JP6586581B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine capable of executing a display effect using a display device when a game ball is won at a start opening (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

  In such a gaming machine, a display effect using a character image, a design, or the like can be performed.

JP 2016-29956 A

  However, even with the above-described gaming machines, there is still room for improvement in the technology for improving the interest of the game.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to improve the interest of games.

  SUMMARY An advantage of some aspects of the invention is to solve at least a part of the problems described above, and the invention can be implemented as the following application examples. Note that the reference numerals in parentheses and supplementary explanations in this column show the correspondence with the embodiments described later in order to help understanding of the present invention, and do not limit the present invention at all. .

[Application Example 1]
First display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
A second display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images, and a gaming machine comprising:
One of the plurality of types of images is a specific image representing a specific target,
The first effect in which the specific image is displayed on the first display unit in a state where the specific image is in contact with the end of the first display unit, and after the first effect, the first A second effect in which the specific image is displayed across both the first display unit and the second display unit in a state where the specific image is continuously in contact with the end of the display unit. , After the second effect, it is possible to execute a third effect in which the hold icon displayed on the second display means changes,
The size of the specific object represented by the specific image in the first effect is different from the size of the specific object represented by the specific image in the second effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the present invention, the interest of games can be improved.

It is a front view of a gaming machine. It is an enlarged view of display devices. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure by the side of the main control board of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure by the side of the sub control board of a game machine. It is a figure for demonstrating main ROM and main RAM. It is a figure for demonstrating a sub ROM and a sub RAM. It is a figure for demonstrating the various random numbers used in a game machine. It is a figure for demonstrating determination table T1-T4. It is explanatory drawing of the big hit classification determination table T5. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 at the time of a non-time-short state. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 at the time-short state. It is explanatory drawing of the electric Chu open | release pattern determination table T7. It is explanatory drawing of the big winning opening opening pattern determination table T8. It is explanatory drawing of V opening-and-closing member opening pattern determination table T9. It is a flowchart of a main control main process. It is a flowchart of a main side timer interruption process. It is a flowchart of a start port sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of the special figure 2 preliminary determination process. It is a flowchart of the special figure 1 pre-determination process. It is a flowchart of a normal operation process. It is a flowchart of special operation processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of jackpot determination processing. It is a 1st flowchart of a fluctuation pattern selection process. It is a 2nd flowchart of a fluctuation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of the special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol confirmation process. It is a flowchart of a game state management process. It is a flowchart of a game state reset process. It is a flowchart of a special electric accessory process. It is a flowchart of V opening-and-closing member operation processing. It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is a flowchart of a V area sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of the number of reserved balls. It is a flowchart which shows a sub control main process. It is a flowchart of a sub-side timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart of a received command analysis process. It is a flowchart of prefetch effect determination processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the structure of a prior determination information storage area. It is explanatory drawing of the prefetch effect pattern determination table T51. It is a flowchart of a change production start process. It is explanatory drawing of basic production pattern determination table T52. It is explanatory drawing of the chance up effect pattern determination table T53. It is a flowchart of the process during fluctuation production. It is a flowchart of a display control process. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation | movement by the image display apparatus. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation | movement by the image display apparatus. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation | movement by the image display apparatus. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation | movement by the board movable accessory 15. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation | movement by the board movable accessory 15. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the display effect A before and behind a movement. It is a figure for demonstrating the display effect B before and behind a movement. It is a figure for demonstrating the display effect C before and behind a movement. It is a figure for demonstrating the display effect D before and behind a movement. It is a figure for demonstrating the display effect E before and behind a movement. It is a figure for demonstrating the display effect F before and behind a movement. It is a figure for demonstrating the image movement display effect A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the image movement display effect B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the image movement display effect C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the image movement display effect D. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the image movement display effect E. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the image movement display effect F. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation part image contact effect A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation part image contact effect B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation part image contact effect C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation part image contact effect D. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation part image contact effect E. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the image movement pending | holding change effect A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the image movement pending | holding change effect B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the image movement suspension change effect C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the image movement pending | holding change effect D. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation corresponding | compatible action display effect A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation corresponding | compatible action display effect B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation corresponding | compatible action display effect C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation corresponding | compatible action display effect D. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the image superimposition display effect A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the image superimposition display effect B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the image superimposition display effect C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating special prefetch effect A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the special prefetch effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the special prefetch effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the special prefetch effect D. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the special prefetch effect E. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating a stirrup reach production. It is a figure for demonstrating the music information display effect A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the music information display effect B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the music information display effect C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the music information display effect D. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating straddle reach production A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating straddle reach production B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the straddle reach production C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the countdown effect A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the countdown effect B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating a barajah production. It is a figure for demonstrating normal reach lose production A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating normal reach lose effect B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the symbol promotion display effect A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the symbol promotion display effect B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the count production A. FIG. It is a figure for explaining the count effect B. It is a figure for explaining the count effect C. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a count effect D. It is a figure for demonstrating the count production E. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the accessory linked display production A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the accessory linked display effect B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the accessory linked display effect C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold display decoration design effect A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold display decoration design effect B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold display decoration design effect C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold display decoration design effect D. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold display decoration design effect E. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the fluctuation time parameter | index effect A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the fluctuation time parameter | index effect B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the fluctuation time parameter | index effect C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the fluctuation time parameter | index effect D. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the fluctuation time parameter | index effect E. FIG.

<First Embodiment>
1. FIG. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine 1 as an embodiment of the present invention. In the following description, the left-right direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described in accordance with the left-right direction viewed from the player facing the gaming machine 1. The forward direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as a direction from the gaming machine 1 toward the player, and the backward direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as a direction from the player toward the gaming machine 1.

  The gaming machine 1 is a pachinko gaming machine that fires a game ball based on a player's launch operation and pays out a predetermined number of game balls to the player when the game ball wins a specific winning device. is there. The gaming machine 1 includes a gaming machine frame 50 and a gaming board 2, and the gaming board 2 is attached inside the gaming machine frame 50. In addition to the front frame (front frame portion) 53, the gaming machine frame 50 includes an outer frame (base frame portion) that forms the outer portion of the gaming machine, and an inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached inside the outer frame. I have. The front frame (front frame portion) 53 is a vertical rectangular unit arranged on the front side of the outer frame and the inner frame, and includes a handle 60, a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 61, and a surplus ball tray (lower plate). ) 62, an effect button 63, a sword member 64, a sword button 65, a frame lamp 66, a speaker 67, and a movable frame body 600. An opening is formed in the center of the front frame 53, and the game area 3 of the game board 2 can be visually recognized through the opening.

  The handle 60 is disposed at the lower end on the right side of the front frame 53, and fires a game ball with a firing strength corresponding to the rotation angle. The hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 61 is provided below the front frame 53 and stores game balls. The surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62 is disposed below the hitting ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 and stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 61. The effect button 63 is an operation unit arranged in the vicinity of the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 61, and is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of an effect executed as the game progresses. The sword member 64 is an operation unit that imitates the shape of a sword, and can be pushed downward by the player during a performance or the like executed as the game progresses. The sword button 65 is an operation portion provided at the upper end portion of the sword member 64, that is, at the end portion of the sword handle, and is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of performance performed as the game progresses. The The sword member 64 is configured to be capable of executing two different operations: a first operation for pushing the entire sword member 64 downward and a second operation for pushing the sword button 65 at the tip. The frame lamp 66 is disposed around the opening of the front frame 53 and performs a light emission effect during a game or the like. The speakers 67 are arranged on the upper left and upper right of the front frame 53, and perform sound effects during a game or the like. The frame movable body 600 is a movable so-called gimmick provided on the upper portion of the front frame 53. The frame movable body 600 is configured to be displaceable from a stored state stored inside the front frame 53 to an exposed state protruding above the front frame 53.

  The game board 2 includes a game area 3, a rail member 4, a board lamp 5, an image display device 7, a center decoration body 10, a fixed prize device (hews) 19, and an ordinary variable prize device (electrical chew) 22. A gate (through chucker) 28, a first big prize device (first attacker) 31, a second big prize device (second attacker) 36, a general prize port 27 (ordinary prize port 27), and a general prize. A mouth 29 (ordinary winning opening 29), an out mouth 16, and indicators 40 are provided.

  The game area 3 is an area where game balls launched by the operation of the handle 60 flow down, and a plurality of game nails for guiding the game balls are provided. The rail member 4 is arranged at the left end of the game area 3 and guides the game ball launched by the operation of the handle 60 toward the upper side of the game area 3. The board lamp 5 is disposed on the back side of the game area 3 and emits light from the back side of the game area 3.

  The image display device 7 is provided near the center of the game area 3 and includes a first image display device 7A and a second image display device 7B. The first image display device 7A includes a display screen 7a. The second image display device 7B includes a display screen 7b. The image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The display screens 7a and 7b of the image display device 7 are a display in which a design symbol display area (decorative display) 8L, 8C, and 8R is variably displayed (also referred to as a variable display) and a hold image 9A and 9B is displayed. It has an image display area and a reserved digest image display area in which the reserved digest image 9C is displayed. The on-hold images 9A and 9B are images representing the on-hold and are also called first hold icons 9A and 9B. The reserved digest image 9C is an image representing the hold and is also referred to as a second hold icon 9C. The first hold icon and the second hold icon are collectively referred to simply as a hold icon.

  The effect symbol display area includes three symbol display areas of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. In the left symbol display area, a left effect symbol (left decorative symbol) 8L is displayed. In the middle symbol display area, a medium effect symbol (medium decoration symbol) 8C is displayed. A right effect design (right decoration design) 8R is displayed in the right design display area. The production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are constituted by a plurality of symbols representing numbers from “1” to “9”, for example. The variation display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is synchronized with the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol described later. The image display device 7 includes a first special symbol displayed by a first special symbol display 41a and a second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later, and a first special symbol and a combination of effects symbols displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas. The result of variable display of the second special symbol (the jackpot lottery result) can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

  For example, when winning a jackpot, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with a doublet such as “777”. If it is out of place, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with a variation such as “637”. This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game. The player can grasp the jackpot lottery result by the image display device 7 in addition to the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b. The position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed. Moreover, as an aspect of the effect symbol variation display, it may be an aspect of scrolling in the vertical direction or an aspect other than that. Depending on each lottery result, what combination of effect symbols is to be stopped and displayed is not limited to the above and can be arbitrarily set. Hereinafter, the effect of displaying the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is also referred to as “effect effect change effect”, “decorative effect change effect”, or simply “change effect”. In addition, this decorative design variation effect counts the effect in a period (also referred to as a special symbol variation period) from when the special symbol starts to stop until it stops, as one variation effect (one cycle variation effect). Therefore, even if the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped during the period from when the special symbol starts to change until it stops, the temporary stop effect is included in the decorative symbol change effect.

  The image display device 7 can display, on the display screens 7a and 7b, a jackpot effect performed in parallel with a jackpot game (an example of a special game), a demonstration effect for waiting for a customer, and the like in addition to the effect symbol variation effect. . In the effect symbol variation effect, effect images such as background images and character images may be displayed in addition to the effect symbols. Further, the image display device 7 can identify that the special symbol is changing or can indicate the lottery result of the special symbol in addition to the effect symbol (fourth symbol, not shown). May be displayed on the display screen 7a. The identification display (fourth symbol) may be displayed by a light emitter such as an LED provided in the game area 3.

  The reserved image display area displays a first reserved display area for displaying a reserved image 9A in accordance with the number of stored first special figure holds, which will be described later, and a reserved image 9B in accordance with the stored number of second special figure reserved, which will be described later. And a second hold display area. The number of stored first special figure holds displayed on the first special figure hold indicator 43a, which will be described later, and the second special figure hold displayed on the second special figure hold indicator 43b by displaying the hold images 9A and 9B. Can be displayed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. The reserved digest image display area includes a reserved digest display area for displaying the reserved digest image 9C. The reserved digest image 9C corresponds to the currently changing effect design (effect designs 8L, 8C, 8R) on the display screen 7a or the display screen 7b. 2 It is possible to display to the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the special figure reservation is digested ("special figure suspension" described later).

  The center decoration body 10 is arranged near the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7. The center decorative body 10 is provided with a movable board movable body 15 (also called a movable board accessory 15) which is a movable so-called gimmick. A stage portion 11 is formed at the lower portion of the center decorative body 10. The stage unit 11 has a shape capable of guiding a game ball rolling on the upper surface of the stage unit 11 to a first starting port 20 described later. A warp portion 12 is provided on the lower left side of the center decorative body 10. The warp unit 12 includes an inlet part through which game balls flow in and an outlet part through which game balls flow out, and causes the game balls that flow in from the inlet part to flow out from the outlet part to the stage unit 11.

  The fixed winning device (jaw) 19 is disposed below the image display device 7 in the game area 3 and the first starting port (first starting winning port, first winning ball) where the ease of entering the game ball does not always change. Mouth, fixed start port) 20. The winning of the game ball to the first start opening 20 is an opportunity for the first special symbol lottery (big hit lottery). In other words, the winning of the game ball to the first start port 20 is an opportunity for obtaining a jackpot random number and determining the jackpot.

  The normal variable winning device (electrical chew) 22 is disposed below the first starting port 20 in the game area 3 and includes a second starting port (second starting winning port, second winning port, variable starting port) 21. ing. The winning of the game ball to the second start port 21 is an opportunity for the second special symbol lottery (big hit lottery). The electric chew 22 includes a movable member 23 in front of the second starting port 21, and opens and closes the second starting port 21 by the operation of the movable member 23. The movable member 23 is driven by an electric chew solenoid 24 (FIG. 3). When the movable member 23 is in the open state, the second starting port 21 can receive a game ball. It should be noted that the electric chew 22 should be easier to enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in the open state than when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. It may be possible to enter the ball.

  The gate (through chucker) 28 is disposed above the first big winning device (first attacker) 31 in the game area 3 and is configured to allow a game ball to pass therethrough. The passing of the game ball to the gate 28 is an opportunity for a normal symbol lottery to determine whether or not to open the electric chew 22. In other words, the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is an opportunity for obtaining a normal symbol random number (per random number) and determining a hit.

  Here, the “special symbol lottery” means that when a game ball wins the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, a random number for determining a special symbol is acquired, and the acquired random number is determined in advance. In addition, it is a process for determining whether or not a big jackpot by comparing with a value corresponding to “big jackpot”. The result of the “hit” lottery is not immediately notified to the player, and a special symbol change display is performed on the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later. When the time has elapsed, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed (determined display), and the player is notified of the lottery result. In the image display device 7, a symbol matching game is performed in which the effect symbols are variably displayed in synchronization with the special symbol variation display. The symbol matching game more effectively notifies the player of the jackpot lottery result.

  The “ordinary symbol lottery” means that when a game ball passes through the gate 28, a random number for determining a normal symbol is obtained, and the obtained random number is compared with a value corresponding to a predetermined “hit”. This is a process for determining whether or not it is a hit. The lottery result of the normal symbol is not necessarily notified immediately after the game ball passes through the gate 28, but the normal symbol display is performed on the normal symbol display 42, which will be described later. When the time has elapsed, the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is confirmed (lit or extinguished), and the player is notified of the lottery result.

  The first grand prize winning device (first attacker, first special variable prize winning device) 31 is arranged at the upper right of the first starting opening 20 in the game area 3, and the first big winning prize opening (first special winning prize opening) 30 and , A V region 39, a non-V region 70, and a V opening / closing member 71. The first big prize opening 30 includes an opening / closing member (first special prize opening opening / closing member) 32 that allows or inhibits the reception of game balls by a swing-type opening / closing operation. The opening / closing member 32 is driven by a first big prize opening solenoid 33 (FIG. 3). The first big prize opening 30 allows a game ball to enter when the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state.

  The first grand prize winning device 31 includes a V region (specific region) 39, a V region sensor 39a (FIG. 3), a non-V region (non-specific region) 70, and a non-V region sensor 70a (FIG. 3). The first big prize opening sensor 30a (FIG. 3), a V opening / closing member 71, and a V opening / closing member solenoid 73 (FIG. 3) are provided. The V region (specific region) 39 and the non-V region (non-specific region) 70 are configured as regions through which the game ball that has passed through the first big winning opening 30 can pass inside the first big winning device 31. . The first grand prize opening sensor 30 a is disposed upstream of the V area 39 and the non-V area 70 and detects the winning of a game ball to the first big prize opening 30. The V area sensor 39 a is arranged in the V area 39 and detects passage of a game ball to the V area 39. The non-V area sensor 70 a is disposed in the non-V area 70 and detects passage of a game ball to the non-V area 70. The V opening / closing member 71 distributes the game balls that have passed through the first big winning opening 30 to either the V region 39 or the non-V region 70. The V opening / closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening / closing member 71. The V opening / closing member 71 is configured to rotate and rotate (clockwise and counterclockwise with respect to the game board 2). When the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is energized, the V opening / closing member 71 rotates counterclockwise from the origin position to play the game ball. When the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, the first state is assigned to the V area 39 (rotation state), and the second state (stop state) is set to be located at the origin and distributes the game balls to the non-V area 70. . Note that the V opening / closing member 71 is not limited to rotational movement, and may have a function of distributing the game balls that have passed through the first grand prize opening 30 to either the V region 39 or the non-V region 70. You may comprise so that it may move to the left-right direction with respect to the game board 2. FIG. That is, when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is energized, the game ball is in a retracted state (first state) in which the game balls are distributed to the V region 39, and when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, the advancing state in which the game balls are distributed to the non-V region 70. You may comprise so that it may become (2nd state). In the gaming machine 1, the passing of the game ball to the V area 39 is an opportunity to shift to a high probability state described later. That is, the V region 39 is a probability changing operation port. On the other hand, the non-V region 70 is not a probability variation operating port. The first grand prize winning device 31 of the present embodiment further includes a first big prize winning device discharge sensor (not shown) that counts the number of game balls discharged from the first big prize winning device 31. The first grand prize winning device discharge sensor is provided at a point where the V region 39 and the non-V region 70 merge downstream, and counts the number of game balls that have passed the V region sensor 39a or the non-V region sensor 70a.

  The second grand prize winning device (second attacker, second special variable prize winning device) 36 is arranged on the upper right side of the first big prize winning port 30 in the game area 3, and the second major prize winning port (second special prize winning port) 35. It has. The second big prize opening 35 includes an opening / closing member (second special prize opening opening / closing member, movable member) 37 that inhibits or allows the reception of the game ball by a swing-type opening / closing operation. The opening / closing member 37 is driven by a second big prize opening solenoid 38 (FIG. 3). The second grand prize opening 35 allows a game ball to enter when the opening / closing member 37 is in an open state.

The general winning opening 27 is provided in the lower part of the game area 3. The out port 16 is provided in the lower part of the game area 3, and discharges game balls that have not won any of the game holes 3 to the outside of the game area 3. The display devices 40 are arranged near the center on the right side of the game board 2. Details of the display devices 40 will be described later.
The general winning opening 29 is located in the lower right part of the game area 3 and adjacent to the right side of the first big winning opening 30.

  The game area 3 includes a left game area 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and a right game area 3B on the right side. A method of hitting a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the left game area 3A is referred to as “left-handed”. On the other hand, a method of hitting a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the right game area 3B is referred to as “right hit”. In the gaming machine 1, it is possible to aim for winning in the first starting port 20 by left-handed. On the other hand, it is configured to be able to aim for a right-handed pass to the gate 28, winning in the second starting port 21, the first major winning port 30, and the second major winning port 35.

  FIG. 2 is an enlarged view of the display device 40. The display 40 includes a first special symbol indicator 41a, a second special symbol indicator 41b, a normal symbol indicator 42, a first special symbol reservation indicator 43a, and a second special symbol indicator 43b. , A general-purpose hold display 44. The first special symbol display 41a variably displays the first special symbol. The second special symbol display 41b variably displays the second special symbol. The normal symbol display 42 variably displays the normal symbol. The first special figure hold indicator 43a displays the stored number of operation hold (first special figure hold) of the first special symbol indicator 41a. The second special figure hold indicator 43b displays the stored number of operation hold (second special figure hold) of the second special symbol display 41b. The general figure hold display 44 displays the number of stored operation hold (common figure hold) of the normal symbol display 42. The variable display of the first special symbol is performed in response to a winning of a game ball at the first start port 20. The variable display of the second special symbol is performed in response to a winning of a game ball at the second start port 21. Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are also collectively referred to as “special symbols”. The first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b are also collectively referred to as “special symbol display 41”. Further, the first special figure hold indicator 43a and the second special figure hold indicator 43b are collectively referred to as a “special figure hold indicator 43”.

  The special symbol display 41 displays a special symbol (identification information) in a variable manner (variable display) and then stops and displays the lottery based on winning in the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 (lottery per special symbol). , The result of the jackpot lottery). The special symbol that is stopped and displayed (the special symbol that is derived and displayed as the display result of the stop symbol and variable display) is one special symbol that is selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by the special symbol lottery. When the stop symbol is a special symbol (a jackpot symbol) having a predetermined jackpot stop mode, the first big prize opening 30 is displayed in an open pattern corresponding to the type of the jackpot symbol that is displayed in a stopped state (the type of the winning jackpot). Alternatively, a special game (a jackpot game) is performed in which the second grand prize winning opening 35 is opened. In addition, the opening pattern of the special winning opening (the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35) in the special game will be described later.

  The special symbol display 41 is composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side, and displays a special symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery per special symbol depending on the lighting mode. For example, if you win a jackpot (one of several types of jackpots to be described later), 1, 2 from the left such as “○ ●●● ○○ ●●” , 5th and 6th LEDs are lit and the jackpot symbol is displayed. In the case of losing, a losing pattern in which only the rightmost LED is lit, such as “●●●●●●● ○”, is displayed. You may employ | adopt the aspect which light-extinguishes all LED as a loss pattern. Before the special symbol is stopped and displayed, variation display (variable display) of the special symbol is performed for a predetermined variation time. For example, each LED may be lit so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode as long as each LED is not stopped (lighted display in a specific mode), and can be any lighting mode. For example, in the variation display mode, all the LEDs may blink simultaneously.

  In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball wins (wins) in the first start port 20 or the second start port 21, various random number values (numerical information) such as jackpot random numbers acquired for the win are obtained. Then, it is temporarily stored in the special figure storage area 85 (FIG. 5). Specifically, if the winning is to the first starting opening 20, it is stored in the first special figure holding storage area 85a (FIG. 5) as the first special figure holding, and if the winning is to the second starting opening 21. The second special figure hold is stored in the second special figure hold storage area 85b (FIG. 5). There is an upper limit to the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage area 85, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is the first special figure reservation storage area 85a and the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. There are four. The special figure hold stored in the special figure hold storage area 85 is digested when the special symbol based on the special figure hold can be variably displayed. “Digestion of special figure hold” means that a jackpot random number or the like corresponding to the special figure hold is determined and variable symbols are displayed to indicate the determination result. Accordingly, in the gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning of the game ball at the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 cannot be performed immediately after the winning, that is, the execution of the variable symbol variable display is performed. Even if there is a win during the execution of a special game or during a special game, the right of lottery for the win can be reserved up to a predetermined number. The number of special figure hold is displayed on the special figure hold display 43. The first special figure hold indicator 43a and the second special figure hold indicator 43b are each composed of, for example, four LEDs. Each special figure holding | maintenance display device 43 displays the number of special figure holding | maintenance by lighting LED for the number of special figure holding | maintenance.

  The variable display of the normal symbol is performed with the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 as an opportunity. The normal symbol display 42 notifies the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 by variably displaying the normal symbol (variation display) and then displaying the stop symbol. A normal symbol that is stopped and displayed (a normal symbol that is derived and displayed as a variable display result) is one normal symbol selected from a plurality of types of normal symbols by a normal symbol lottery. If the normal stop symbol is a predetermined specific normal symbol (a normal symbol of a predetermined stop mode, that is, a normal winning symbol), an auxiliary game that opens the second start port 21 to an open pattern according to the current game state Is done. The opening pattern of the second start port 21 will be described later.

  The normal symbol display 42 is composed of two LEDs, and displays a normal symbol corresponding to the result of the normal symbol lottery according to the lighting mode. For example, when the lottery result is a win, a normal winning symbol in which both LEDs are lit is displayed as “◯◯” (◯: lit, ●: unlit). When the lottery result is a loss, a normal loss symbol in which only the right LED is lit is displayed as “● ○”. You may employ | adopt the aspect which light-extinguishes all LED as a normal lose pattern. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the normal symbol is changed over a predetermined fluctuation time. As the variation display mode, for example, both LEDs may be lit alternately. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode as long as each LED is not stopped (lighted display in a specific mode), and can be any lighting mode. For example, in the variation display mode, all the LEDs may blink simultaneously.

  In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball passes to the gate 28, the value of the normal symbol random number (per random number) obtained for the passage is stored as a general figure hold in the general figure hold storage area 86 (FIG. 5). Once memorized. There is an upper limit to the number of pending map holds that can be stored in the reserved map storage area 86, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is four. The general map reservation stored in the general map storage area 86 is digested when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the general map storage becomes possible. The digestion of the general symbol hold means that a normal symbol random number (per random number) corresponding to the general symbol hold is determined and variable symbol display for displaying the determination result is executed. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passage, that is, during the execution of the variable symbol display of the normal symbol or the auxiliary game. Even if there is, the right of the normal symbol lottery for the passage can be reserved up to the predetermined number. The number of the general map hold is displayed on the general map hold display 44. The common figure hold indicator 44 is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of common figure holds by turning on the LEDs by the number of common figure hold.

2. Electrical configuration of gaming machine The electrical configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the main control board side of the gaming machine 1. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the sub-control board side of the gaming machine 1. The gaming machine 1 includes a main control board 80 (FIG. 3), a sub control board 90 (FIG. 4), an image control board 100 (FIG. 4), a lamp control board 107 (FIG. 4), and a voice control board 106 (FIG. 4). 4) and a payout control board 110 (FIG. 3). The main control board 80 is a game control board that performs control related to game profits such as big wins lottery and game state transition, and constitutes a main control unit. The sub-control board 90 is an effect control board that performs control related to effects executed as the game progresses, and constitutes a sub-control unit together with the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the sound control board 106. The sub-control unit can be configured as long as it includes at least the sub-control board 90.

  The main control board 80 includes a game control microcomputer 81 and an input / output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the main control board 80, and controls the progress of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a main ROM 83 that stores a program for controlling the progress of the game, a main RAM 84 that is used as a work memory, and a main CPU 82 that executes the program stored in the main ROM 83. Contains. Details of the data stored in the main ROM 83 and details of the storage area provided in the main RAM 84 will be described later. The main ROM 83 may be configured as an external ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits / receives data to / from other boards via an input / output circuit (I / O port unit) 87. The input / output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81.

  Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87 and a relay board 88. The main control board 80 receives signals output from the sensors and outputs signals to the solenoids. Sensors connected via the relay board 88 include a first start port sensor 20a, a second start port sensor 21a, a gate sensor 28a, a first large winning port sensor 30a, a second large winning port sensor 35a, and a V region. The sensor 39a, the non-V area sensor 70a, and the normal winning a prize port sensors 27a and 29a are illustrated. Examples of solenoids connected via the relay board 88 include the electric Chu solenoid 24, the first big prize opening solenoid 33, the second big prize winning solenoid 38, and the V opening / closing member solenoid 73. The first start port sensor 20 a is provided inside the first start port 20 and detects a game ball that has won the first start port 20. The second start port sensor 21 a is provided inside the second start port 21 and detects a game ball that has won the second start port 21. The gate sensor 28 a is provided inside the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first big prize opening sensor 30 a is provided inside the first big prize opening 30 and detects a game ball won in the first big prize opening 30. The second grand prize opening sensor 35 a is provided inside the second big prize opening 35 and detects a game ball that has won the second big prize opening 35. The V area sensor 39 a is provided in the V area 39 inside the first big winning opening 30 and detects a game ball that has passed through the V area 39. The non-V area sensor 70 a is provided in the non-V area 70 inside the first big winning opening 30 and detects a game ball that has passed through the non-V area 70. The normal winning port sensor 27 a is provided inside the normal winning port 27 and detects a game ball won in the normal winning port 27. The normal winning opening sensor 29 a detects a game ball that has passed through the normal winning opening 29. The electric chew solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric chew 22. The first big prize opening solenoid 33 drives the opening / closing member 32 of the first big prize winning device 31. The second big prize opening solenoid 38 drives the opening / closing member 37 of the second big prize winning device 36. The V opening / closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening / closing member 71 of the first big prize winning device 31.

  Indicators 40 are connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special figure hold display 43a, a second special figure hold display 43b, and a general figure hold. Display control for the display 44 is performed.

  A payout control board 110 is connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The payout control board 110 is connected with a prize ball payout device 120, a rental ball payout device 130, and a card unit 135, and a launch device 112 is connected via a launch control circuit 111. The prize ball payout device 120 pays out a prize ball. Based on a signal from the game control microcomputer 81, the payout control board 110 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 to pay out the prize ball. The prize ball to be paid out is detected by the prize ball sensor 122 for counting. The rental ball payout device 130 pays out a rental ball. Based on the signal from the card unit 135 connected to the gaming machine 1, the payout control board 110 drives the ball rental motor 131 of the ball rental payout device 130 to pay out the balls. The paid-out ball rental is detected by the ball rental sensor 132 for counting. The card unit 135 is arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 1 and outputs information related to ball rental based on information such as the inserted prepaid card. The firing device 112 includes a handle 60 (FIG. 1), a firing motor 113, a touch switch 114, and a firing volume 115. When the player operates the handle 60, the launching device 112 detects the touch of the handle 60 with the touch switch 114 and detects the amount of rotation of the handle 60 with the firing volume 115. Then, the launch motor 113 is driven so that the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the launch volume 115.

  A sub control board 90 (FIG. 4) is connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection that can only transmit signals from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90. That is, between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90, a unidirectional circuit (not shown) as a communication direction regulating means (for example, a circuit using a diode) is interposed.

  The sub-control board 90 includes an effect control microcomputer 91 and an input / output circuit 95. The effect control microcomputer 91 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the sub-control board 90, and controls the effect of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to the program. The effect control microcomputer 91 is a sub ROM 93 that stores a program for controlling an effect as the game progresses, a sub RAM 94 that is used as a work memory, and a sub ROM 93 that executes a program stored in the sub ROM 93. CPU92. Details of the data stored in the sub ROM 93 and details of the storage area provided in the sub RAM 94 will be described later. The sub ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits / receives data to / from another board or the like via an input / output circuit (I / O port unit) 95. The input / output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91. An image control board 100, an audio control board 106, a lamp control board 107, and a relay board 108 are connected to the sub control board 90 via an input / output circuit 95.

  The image control board 100 includes an image control microcomputer 101, an input circuit 105a, and an output circuit 105b. The image control microcomputer 101 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the image control board 100 and controls display of the image display device 7 (first image display device 7A and second image display device 7B) according to a program. The image control microcomputer 101 includes a CPU 102, a ROM 103, and a RAM 104. In addition to a program for controlling display, the ROM 103 stores still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device 7, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers, symbols, etc. And image data such as background images are stored. The RAM 104 is used as a memory for developing image data. The CPU 102 executes a program stored in the ROM 103. The effect control microcomputer 91 causes the image control microcomputer 101 to perform display control of the image display device 7 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The image control microcomputer 101 reads image data from the ROM 103 based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91 and performs display control based on the read image data.

  A speaker 67 is connected to the audio control board 106, and the production control microcomputer 91 receives voice, music, and sound effects from the speaker 67 via the audio control board 106 based on a command received from the main control board 80. Etc. are output. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90. The voice control board 106 may be mounted with a CPU, and may cause the CPU to execute voice control based on commands. Furthermore, the voice control board 106 may be mounted with a ROM and may store acoustic data in the ROM. Further, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 may execute sound control. Furthermore, acoustic data may be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100.

  A frame lamp 66, a panel lamp 5, and a panel movable body 15 are connected to the lamp control board 107, and these are controlled. The effect control microcomputer 91 performs lighting control of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 via the lamp control board 107 based on the command received from the main control board 80. In other words, the effect control microcomputer 91 creates light emission pattern data (also referred to as data for determining lighting / extinction, light emission color, or lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5, and the light emission pattern Light emission of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 is controlled according to the data. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data. The effect control microcomputer 91 operates the movable board 15 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The board movable body 15 is a movable so-called gimmick provided in the center decorative body 10. The effect control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data (driving data) for determining the operation mode of the movable board 15 and controls the operation of the movable board 15 according to the operation pattern data. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. The lamp control board 107 may be mounted with a CPU, and the CPU may execute lamp lighting control and operation control of the panel movable body 15 based on commands. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may be mounted with a ROM, and data related to the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

  An effect button detection switch 63a and a movable frame body 600 are connected to the relay board 108. The effect button detection switch 63a detects that the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) has been pressed. When the effect button 63 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the effect button detection switch 63a to the sub-control board 90 via the relay board 108. The effect control microcomputer 91 operates the frame movable body 600 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The frame movable body 600 is a movable so-called gimmick provided on the upper part of the front frame 53 (FIG. 1). The effect control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data (drive data) that determines the operation mode of the movable frame body 600, and controls the operation of the movable frame body 600 according to the operation pattern data. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. The relay board 108 includes a select button detection switch that detects that the select button 68 (FIG. 1) is pressed, a touch sensor that is provided on the front frame 53 and outputs a detection signal when the human body touches. It may be connected.

3. Data structure of gaming machine The data structure of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5A is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the main ROM 83. FIG. 5B is a diagram for explaining a storage area provided in the main RAM 84. FIG. 6A is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the sub-ROM 93. FIG. 6B is a diagram for explaining a storage area provided in the sub-RAM 94.

  The main ROM 83 (FIG. 5A) includes a jackpot determination table T1, a reach determination table T2, a normal symbol hit determination table T3, a normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, a jackpot type determination table T5, and a variation pattern. A determination table T6, an electric chew opening pattern determination table T7, a special winning opening opening pattern determination table T8, and a V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9 are stored. These determination tables are referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in a main control main process (described later) executed by the game control microcomputer 81. Specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

  The main RAM 84 (FIG. 5B) includes a command set area 84a, a flag set area 84b, a counter set area 84c, a special operation status set area 84d, a special figure hold storage area 85, and a general figure hold storage. A region 86 is provided. The command set area 84a is an area (output buffer) in which a command output from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side is set in the main control main process (described later). A variation start command, a variation stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a gaming state designation command, a V passing command, a customer waiting command, etc. are set. The flag set area 84b is an area in which flags indicating the state of the gaming machine and the gaming state are set in the main control main process (described later), and a jackpot flag, a jackpot end flag, a first prize flag, a second prize flag, A V flag, a probability change flag, a time reduction flag, etc. are set. The counter set area 84c is an area in which a counter used in main control main processing (described later) is set, and a random number counter, a round counter, a probability variation counter, a time reduction counter, and the like are set therein. The special operation status set area 84d is an area in which a status in special operation processing described later is set. The special figure hold storage area 85 includes a first special figure hold storage area 85a in which the first special figure hold is stored, and a second special figure hold storage area 85b in which the second special figure hold is stored. In the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, random number groups (holding information) such as random numbers per special symbol corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth of the first special figure reservation, respectively. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area for storage are provided. In the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, a first random number group (hold information) corresponding to each of the first, second, third, and fourth special figure reservations is stored. A storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. The usual figure reservation storage area 86 stores random value groups (holding information) such as normal symbol random numbers (per random number) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth of the usual figure hold. For this purpose, a first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. In addition to the above-mentioned area, the main RAM 84 has a hit type set buffer in which special figure stop symbol data is set, and a drive in which drive data for driving the panel movable body 15 and the frame movable body 600 is set. A data buffer or the like is provided.

  In the sub ROM 93 (FIG. 6A), a prefetch effect pattern determination table T51, a basic effect pattern determination table T52, a chance up effect pattern determination table T53, and a stop symbol pattern determination table T54 are stored. . These determination tables are referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91 in a sub-control main process (described later) executed by the effect control microcomputer 91. Specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

  The sub RAM 94 (FIG. 6B) is provided with a command storage area 94a, an effect command set area 94b, a prior determination information storage area 94c, and a counter set area 94d. The command storage area 94a is an area (input buffer) for storing commands input from the main control unit side in the sub-control main process (described later), and includes a preliminary determination command, a reserved ball number command, a change start command, a change Stored are a stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a gaming state designation command, a V passing command, a customer waiting command, and the like. The effect command set area 94b is an area (in which a command output from the sub control board 90 to the image control board 100, the sound control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108 is set in the sub control main process (described later) ( An output buffer), a change effect start command, a pre-change end command, a change effect end command, an opening effect start command, a round effect start command, an ending effect start command, and the like are set. The advance determination information storage area 94c stores advance determination information in the sub-control main process (described later). The counter set area 94d is an area in which counters used in the sub-control main process (described later) are set, and is a random number counter, a first special figure hold effect counter, a second special figure hold effect counter, and a general figure hold effect counter. A probability variation effect counter, a time reduction effect counter, and the like are set.

  FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the gaming machine 1. FIG. 7A shows random numbers acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 on the main control unit side, and FIG. 7B shows random numbers acquired by the effect control microcomputer 91 on the sub control unit side. Yes. The game control microcomputer 81 acquires “big hit random number”, “big hit type random number”, “reach random number”, “variable pattern random number”, and “normal symbol random number (hit random number)” at a timing described later. It is configured as follows. The “big hit random number” is a random number used for a lottery (big hit determination) as to whether or not a big hit, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 65535. The “big hit type random number” is a random number used for the lottery (big hit type determination) of the winning big hit type, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The “reach random number” is a random number used to determine whether or not to generate reach in the effect design variation effect indicating the result when the jackpot determination is lost, and a value in the range of 0 to 127 Take. Reach is a state where there is only one effect symbol that is variably displayed among a plurality of effect symbols (decorative symbols), and depending on which symbol the effect symbol that is variably displayed is stopped and displayed. It is a state (for example, a state of “7 ↓ 7”) that is a combination of effect symbols indicating a big win. Note that the effect symbols that are stopped and displayed in the reach state may be displayed as if they are shaking in the display screen 7a. The “variation pattern random number” is a random number used to determine a variation pattern including a variation time, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The “ordinary symbol random number (per random number)” is used for a lottery (ordinary symbol lottery) as to whether or not an auxiliary game for opening the electric chew 22 is performed. The normal symbol random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 255. The “big hit random number”, the “big hit type random number”, the “reach random number”, and the “variation pattern random number” are acquired based on the ball entering the starting port (the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21). The random value group acquired based on the entrance to the first start port 20 is stored in the first special figure storage area 85a, and the random value group acquired based on the entrance to the second start port 21 is It is stored in the second special figure storage area 85b. The “normal symbol random number (per random number)” is acquired based on the passage through the gate 28. The acquired normal symbol random number value is stored in the general symbol hold storage area 86.

  The effect control microcomputer 91 is configured to acquire a “prefetch effect random number” and a “chance up random number” at a timing described later. The “prefetch effect random number” is a random number used to determine the prefetch effect at the time of the change effect, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The “chance up random number” is a random number used to determine the chance up effect at the time of the fluctuation effect, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The “prefetching effect random number” is acquired based on the output of the prior determination command from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side. The acquired random value group is stored in the sub RAM 94. The “chance-up random number” is acquired based on the output of the change start command from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side. The acquired random number value is stored in the sub RAM 94.

  FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the determination tables T1 to T4. FIG. 8A shows a diagram for explaining the jackpot determination table T1, FIG. 8B shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2, and FIG. 8C shows the diagram. FIG. 8A is a diagram for explaining the normal symbol hit determination table T3, and FIG. 8D shows a diagram for explaining the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4.

  The jackpot determination table T1 indicates whether the jackpot random number value (any one of 0 to 65535) corresponds to “hit” or “losing” in the main control main process (described later) by the game control microcomputer 81. It is a table referred to for determination. In FIG. 8A, in the “normal probability state”, when the jackpot random number value is “0 to 164”, it is determined as “big hit”, and the jackpot random value is a numerical value other than “0 to 164” (165 to 65535). ")" Indicates that it is determined to be "lost". In the “high probability state”, when the jackpot random number value is “0 to 649”, it is determined as “big hit”, and when the jackpot random number value is “a numerical value other than 0 to 649 (650 to 65535)”. Is determined to be “lost”. The contents of “normal probability state” and “high probability state” will be described later.

  In the reach determination table T2, in the game control microcomputer 81, the acquired reach random number value (any of 0 to 127) corresponds to “with reach” or “without reach” in the main control main process (described later). It is a table that is referred to in order to determine whether In FIG. 8B, when the reach random number value is “0 to 13” in the “non-time-short state”, it is determined that “there is a reach”, and the reach random number value is a numerical value other than “0 to 13” (14 to 13). 127) "indicates that it is determined that" no reach ". Further, when the reach random number value is “0 to 5” in the “short time state”, it is determined that “there is present”, and when the reach random number value is “a numerical value other than 0 to 5 (6 to 127)”. Indicates that “no reach” is determined. The contents of “time saving state” and “non-time saving state” will be described later. In the reach determination table T2, the time-short state is less likely to reach the lost time than the non-time-short state. This is to increase the digestion speed of special figure reservation by selecting more reachless loses with a short variation time in the short time state.

  The normal symbol hit determination table T3 corresponds to whether the acquired normal symbol random number value (any of 0 to 255) corresponds to “win” or “lost” in the main control main process (described later) by the game control microcomputer 81. It is a table referred to for determining whether to do. In FIG. 8C, when the normal symbol random number value is “0 to 2” in the “non-time-short state”, it is determined as “winning”, and the normal symbol random number value is a numerical value other than “0 to 2” (3 ˜255) ”indicates that it is determined to be“ lost ”. Further, when the normal symbol random number value is “0 to 254” in the “time saving state”, it is determined as “winning”, and when the normal symbol random number value is “a numerical value other than 0 to 254 (255)”. It is shown that it is determined as “losing”.

  The normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 determines how many seconds the variation time of the normal symbol depends on the game state (non-short time state or short time state) in the main control main process (described later) by the game control microcomputer 81. This is a table that is referred to. In FIG. 8D, the normal symbol variation time is determined to be “30 seconds” in the “non-short-time state”, and the normal symbol variation time is determined to be “1 second” in the “time-short state”. It has been shown.

  FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot type determination table T5. According to the jackpot type determination table T5, in the main control main process (described later), the game control microcomputer 81 obtains the jackpot type random number (any one of 0 to 127) according to the “big hit type” and “special symbol type”. It is a table referred to in order to determine “type”. In FIG. 9, when the lottery of the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) is won, if the jackpot type random number value is “0 to 24”, the jackpot type is determined to be “16RV planned passing jackpot”, One stop symbol (special symbol stop symbol) is determined as “big hit symbol 1”. When the jackpot type random number value is “25 to 49”, the jackpot type is determined to be “16RV scheduled jackpot”, and the special figure stop symbol is determined to be “jackpot symbol 2”. When the jackpot type random number value is “50 to 55”, the jackpot type is determined as “16R (substantially 15R) V passing planned jackpot”, and the special figure stop symbol is determined as “jackpot symbol 3”. When the jackpot type random number value is “56 to 67”, the jackpot type is determined to be “16R (substantial 13R) V passing planned jackpot”, and the special figure stop symbol is determined to be “jackpot symbol 4”. When the jackpot type random number value is “68 to 127”, the jackpot type is determined to be “16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot”, and the special figure stop symbol is determined to be “jackpot symbol 5”. On the other hand, when winning in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), regardless of the jackpot type random value (any of 0 to 127), the jackpot type is determined to be “16RV scheduled passing jackpot”, It is shown that the stop symbol (special symbol stop symbol) in the special figure 2 is determined as the “big hit symbol 1”. By referring to the jackpot type determination table T5, the “special figure stop symbol data” corresponding to the special figure stop symbol, the “opening (OP) command”, the “round designation command”, the “ending (ED)” of the special game Command "can also be specified. For specific details of “16RV planned jackpot”, “16R (substantial 15R) V planned jackpot”, “16R (substantial 13R) V planned jackpot” and “16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing jackpot” It will be described later.

  FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the variation pattern determination table T6 in the non-short-time state. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the variation pattern determination table T6 in the time-short state. The variation pattern determination table T6 is a table that is referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine a variation pattern according to the acquired variation pattern random value (0 to 127) in the main control main process (described later). . In FIG. 10, for example, the first starting port 20 is won in a non-time-saving state, it is determined as “losing” in the jackpot determination table T1, “reach is present” is determined in the reach determination table T2, and the number of held balls is “1”. When the variation pattern random number value is “0-60”, the variation pattern is determined to be “P7”. In FIG. 11, for example, the second start port 21 is won in the short-time state, it is determined as “big hit” in the jackpot determination table T1, and it is determined as “16RV expected jackpot” in the jackpot type determination table T5. Is “0 to 10”, it is indicated that the variation pattern is determined to be “P61”. As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, if the variation pattern is determined, the variation time is also determined. In addition, when reaching reach, it is also determined whether the reach is normal reach or super reach (SP reach). Super reach is a reach production that has a longer variation time after reach than normal reach. Here, three types of super reach (SP1, SP2, SP3) having different fluctuation times are set. The length of the variation time is SP3> SP2> SP1. In SP1 to SP3, it is executed progressively through normal reach. The difference between SP1 and SP3 may be, for example, the presence or absence of pseudo-continuations.

  FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the electric chew release pattern determination table T7. The electric chew release pattern determination table T7 is used for the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the open pattern of the electric chew 22 in accordance with the game state (non-short-time state or short-time state) in the main control main process (described later). It is a table to be referenced. In FIG. 12 (A), the open pattern of the electric chew 22 is determined as “open pattern 11” in the “non-short-time state”, and the open pattern is determined as “open pattern 12” in the “short-time state”. It has been shown. FIG. 12B shows the contents of the opening pattern 11 and the opening pattern 12. In the opening pattern 11, the electric chew 22 is opened once and the opening time is 0.2 seconds. In the opening pattern 12, the electric chew 22 is opened at an opening time of 3 seconds, an opening time of 2.0 seconds, and an interval (opening interval) of 1.0 second. However, the opening of the electric chew 22 is closed even if the opening time remains when there is a predetermined number of game balls won (a predetermined number of winnings, a maximum of 10).

  FIG. 13 is a view for explaining the special winning opening opening pattern determination table T8. In the main winning opening opening pattern determination table T8, in the main control main process (described later), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the first main winning opening 30 and the second large winning opening according to the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9). It is a table referred to in order to determine 35 open patterns. In FIG. 13A, when the special figure stop symbol data is “11H”, “12H”, or “21H”, the opening pattern of the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35 is “open pattern 21”. When the special figure stop symbol data is “14H” or “15H”, the release pattern is determined as “open pattern 22”, and when the special figure stop symbol data is “13H”, the release pattern is “open”. It is shown that the pattern is determined as “pattern 23”. FIG. 13B shows the contents of the opening pattern 21, the opening pattern 22, and the opening pattern 23. In the opening pattern 21, the first grand opening 30 is opened (long opening) for the 1st to 13th and 15th R, and the opening time is 29.5 seconds. The second grand prize winning opening 35 having an opening time of 29.5 seconds is opened (long opening). In the opening pattern 22, the first grand opening 30 is opened (long opening) for the 1st to 13th rounds with the number of times of opening once and the opening time of 29.5 seconds, and the number of times of opening once for the 14th and 16th rounds. The second big prize opening 35 is opened (short-open) for 0.1 seconds, and the first big prize opening 30 is opened (short-open) for the number of times of opening once and for 0.1 seconds at the 15th round. . In the opening pattern 23, the first grand prize opening 30 is opened (long opening) for the 1st to 13th and 15th R, with the number of times of opening once and the opening time of 29.5 seconds. The second grand prize opening 35 is opened (short opening) for 0.1 seconds, and at the 16th round, the second big prize opening 35 is opened (long opening) with the number of times of opening once and an opening time of 29.5 seconds. . However, the opening of the first grand prize opening 30 and the second big prize opening 35 may be performed even if the opening time remains when a predetermined number of game balls have been won (the maximum number of winning prizes is 9). Closed.

  FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9. The V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9 is used for the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 according to the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9) in the main control main process (described later). It is a table to be referenced. In FIG. 14A, when the special figure stop symbol data is “11H”, “12H”, or “21H”, the open pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 is determined as “open pattern 31”, and the special figure stop symbol is determined. When the data is “13H”, the release pattern is determined as “open pattern 32”, and when the special figure stop symbol data is “14H”, the release pattern is determined as “open pattern 33”, and the special figure stop symbol data is When “15H”, the open pattern is determined to be “open pattern 34”. FIG. 14B shows the contents of the opening pattern 31, the opening pattern 32, the opening pattern 33, and the opening pattern 34. In the opening pattern 31, the V opening / closing member 71 is opened for a short time of 0.1 seconds when the first winning prize 30 is received at the second, fourth, sixth, and eighth rounds. In the 10th and 12th R, when the first prize is received in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening / closing member 71 is opened for a short time of 0.1 seconds, and when the second prize is received, the opening time The V opening / closing member 71 is opened long for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 32, when the first winning prize 30 is received at the second, fourth, sixth, and twelfth R, the V opening and closing member 71 is opened for a short time of 0.1 second. On the 8th and 10th R, when the first winning prize 30 is won, the V opening / closing member 71 is opened for a short time of 0.1 seconds, and when the second winning is received, the opening time The V opening / closing member 71 is opened long for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 33, when the first winning prize 30 is received in the second and sixth rounds, the V opening / closing member 71 is opened for a short time of 0.1 seconds, and the second winning is found. When this occurs, the V opening / closing member 71 is opened long for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the fourth, eighth, tenth and twelfth rounds, when the first winning prize 30 is won, the V opening / closing member 71 is opened for a short time of 0.1 seconds. In the opening pattern 34, the V opening / closing member 71 is opened for a short time of 0.1 second when the first winning prize 30 is received in the second, fourth, sixth, eighth, tenth and twelfth rounds. .

4). Explanation of jackpot etc. In the gaming machine 1, there are “bonanza” and “losing” as a result of the jackpot lottery (special symbol lottery). In the case of “hit”, the “hit symbol” is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. In the case of “losing”, the special symbol display 41 stops and displays “losing symbol”. When winning a jackpot, the winning prize opening (the first winning prize opening 30 and the second winning prize opening 35) is opened with an opening pattern corresponding to the type of special symbol (the type of jackpot) that is stopped and displayed. Is executed. The jackpot game is an example of a special game. The jackpot game includes a plurality of round games (unit open game), an opening (OP) before the first round game is started, and an ending (ED) after the last round game is finished. Yes. Each round game starts at the end of the opening or at the end of the previous round game and ends at the start of the next round game. The closing time (interval time) of the big prize opening between round games is included in the open round game before the closing.

  There are several types of jackpots. The jackpot type is as shown in FIG. Here, the types of jackpots are roughly divided into “V pass planned jackpot” and “V non-passed jackpot”. “V pass planned jackpot” operates the opening / closing member 32, the opening / closing member 37, and the V opening / closing member 71 in an opening pattern (a V passing scheduled opening pattern) in which a game ball can pass to the V region 39 during the jackpot game. It is a jackpot. Here, the jackpot of the special figure stop symbol data of 11H to 14H, 21H corresponds to the “V passing planned jackpot”. The combination of the opening pattern of the opening and closing member 32 and the opening and closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening and closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 is (open pattern 21: open pattern 31), (open pattern 22: open pattern 33). ) Or (open pattern 23: open pattern 32), the game ball can pass to the V area 39 during the big hit game. “V non-passing expected jackpot” is an opening pattern in which a game ball cannot pass to the V area 39 during the jackpot game (V non-passing scheduled opening pattern), the opening / closing member 32, the opening / closing member 37 and the V opening / closing member 71. It is a jackpot that operates. Here, the jackpot of the special figure stop symbol data of 17H corresponds to the “V non-passing jackpot”. When the combination of the opening pattern of the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 is (opening pattern 22: opening pattern 34), the V region during the jackpot game The game ball cannot pass to 39. As described above, the opening pattern 22 of the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing member 37 serves as both a V passing planned opening pattern and a V non-passing scheduled opening pattern.

  “V-planned jackpot” includes “16RV-planned jackpot”, “16R (substantial 13R) V-planned jackpot” and “16R (substantial 15R) V-planned jackpot”. The “16RV expected jackpot” has a substantial total number of rounds of 16R. From 1R to 13R and 15R, the first grand prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R. 14R and 16R open the second grand prize opening 35 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 21). In 10R and 12R, the V opening / closing member 71 is opened long (FIG. 14: opening pattern 31), and can easily pass through the V region 39 in the first big prize opening 30.

  “16R (substantial 13R) V passing expected jackpot” has a total number of rounds of 16R, but the total number of rounds is 13R. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but at 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R, and 14R and Even at 16R, the second grand prize opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this “16R (substantially 13R) V passing expected jackpot”, from 14R to 16R, the opening time of the big prize opening is extremely short, and it is a round in which no winning ball can be expected. That is, “16R (substantially 13R) V passing expected jackpot” is a jackpot of substantially 13R. In 2R and 6R, the V opening / closing member 71 is opened long (FIG. 14: opening pattern 33), and can easily pass through the V region 39 in the first big winning opening 30.

  “16R (substantially 15R) V passing expected jackpot” has a total number of rounds of 16R, but the total number of rounds is 15R. That is, from 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, and in 16R the second big prize opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 14R The second big prize opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 23). Therefore, in this “16R (substantially 15R) V passing expected jackpot”, 14R is a round in which the opening time of the big prize opening is extremely short and no winning ball can be expected. That is, “16R (substantially 15R) V passing expected jackpot” is a jackpot of substantially 15R. In 8R and 10R, the V opening / closing member 71 is opened long (FIG. 14: opening pattern 32), and can easily pass through the V region 39 in the first big prize opening 30.

  “V non-passing jackpot” is “16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing jackpot” of the open pattern 22 in which the total number of rounds is 16R but the total number of rounds is 13. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but at 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R, and 14R and Even at 16R, the second grand prize opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this “16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing expected jackpot”, the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely short from 14R to 16R, and it is a round in which no winning ball can be expected. That is, “16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing expected jackpot” is a jackpot of substantially 13R. In 2R, 4R, 6R, 8R, 10R and 12R, the V opening / closing member 71 is opened, but the opening is a short opening (FIG. 14: opening pattern 34), and the V region 39 in the first big winning opening 30 is opened. It is almost impossible for game balls to pass through.

  As apparent from the above description, the “16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing expected jackpot” and the “16R (substantially 13R) V expected passing jackpot” are the first grand prize opening 30 and the second big prize opening 35 ( The opening pattern of the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing member 37) is the same (opening pattern 22), and only the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 is different (opening pattern 34 and opening pattern 33). That is, “16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing expected jackpot” is that it is almost impossible for a game ball to pass through the V area 39 in the first big winning opening 30 and the gaming state after the jackpot is Low accuracy time short state (low accuracy high base state). On the other hand, the “16R (substantially 13R) V passing planned jackpot” makes it easy to pass the game ball to the V area 39 in the first big winning opening 30 and the gaming state after the jackpot is highly accurate. It becomes a short time state (highly accurate high base state). This makes it difficult for the player to distinguish between “16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing jackpot” and “16R (substantially 13R) V passing jackpot”, and the gaming state after the jackpot is less probable. It becomes difficult to determine whether the time-short state (low-accuracy base state) or the high-accuracy time-short state (high-accuracy high-base state) is reached. That is, the game state after “16R (substantially 13R) V passing expected jackpot” is a high-probability time-short state (high-probability high-base state) when a game ball passes through the V region 39 in the first big winning opening 30 ) But a high probability is a latent state (latent probability variation state).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9, the jackpot distribution ratio in the lottery of the first special symbol (special diagram 1) is 68/128 (about 53%) for the V pass expected jackpot and 60/60 for the V non-passed jackpot. 128 (about 47%). On the other hand, the jackpots won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special map 2) are all the jackpots that are expected to pass V. In other words, when a big win is won by a lottery based on winning a prize to the second starting port 21 that can be entered by executing electric support control, which will be described later, the V passing planned jackpot is always made. As described above, in the gaming machine 1, the jackpot that is performed by winning the game ball at the second start port 21 rather than the jackpot lottery (the lottery of the first special symbol) that is performed by winning the game ball at the first start port 20. The lottery (the lottery of the second special symbol) is set to be advantageous to the player.

5. Description of the gaming state The gaming state of the gaming machine 1 will be described. The game control microcomputer 81 can execute “probability variation control” and “variation time reduction control” for the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display 41 and the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display 42, respectively. It is. Here, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 is controlling the probability variation with respect to the special symbol of the special symbol display 41 is referred to as a “high probability state”, and the state where the probability variation control is not performed is simply referred to as a “normal probability state ( Non-high probability state, low probability state) ”. The game control microcomputer 81 uses a jackpot determination table (FIG. 8A) in which the number of jackpot random numbers determined to be jackpots is higher in the high probability state than in the normal probability state as the probability variation control of the special symbol. A high probability state is realized by performing the jackpot determination. Accordingly, the high probability state has a higher probability of jackpot than the normal probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the probability variation control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, the special symbol display 41 is compared with the case where the probability variation control is not performed. The probability that the display result of the special symbol variable display (stop symbol) becomes a jackpot symbol is high.

  In addition, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 is performing the variable time reduction control with respect to the special symbol on the special symbol display 41 is referred to as a “time-short state”, and the state in which the game time control is not being performed is simply “a non-time-short state”. That's it. In the short-time state, the variation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of variation display to the time when the display result is derived and displayed) is shorter than that in the non-short-time state. The game control microcomputer 81 uses a variation pattern determination table T6 (FIGS. 10 and 11) determined so that a variation pattern having a short variation time is selected more frequently than in a non-time reduction state in the time-short state. The used variation pattern is determined. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the variable time reduction control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, the special symbol is variable as compared with the case where the variable time reduction control is not executed. A short variation time is easily selected as the display variation time. As a result, in the short-time state, the special-patch holding pace is accelerated, and an effective winning (a winning that can be stored as a special-pending hold) at the starting port is likely to occur. As a result, it is possible to aim for a big hit with smooth progress of the game. The game control microcomputer 81 may execute the probability variation control and the variation time shortening control on the special symbol of the special symbol display 41 at the same time, or may execute only one of them.

  The game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability variation control and variation time reduction control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42 in synchronization with the variation time reduction control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41. That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability variation control and the variation time reduction control for the normal symbol in the time-short state and does not execute it in the non-time-short state. The game control microcomputer 81 performs normal symbol per-symbol determination table T3 in which the number of normal symbol random values (hit random number values) determined to be hit is more in the short-time state than in the non-short-time state as the normal symbol probability variation control. Using FIG. 8C, a hit determination (ordinary symbol determination) is performed. Therefore, in the short time state, the hit probability is higher than that in the normal symbol normal probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the probability variation control on the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, the normal symbol display 42 is used as compared with the case where the probability variation control is not performed. The probability that the display result (stopped symbol) of the variable symbol normal display will be a winning symbol increases. In the short-time state, the normal symbol variation time is shorter than in the non-short-time state. Here, the variation time of the normal symbol is 30 seconds in the non-short-time state, but is 1 second in the short-time state (FIG. 8D). Furthermore, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game is longer than that in the non-time-saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes open time extension control for the electric chew 22. In addition, in the short time state, the number of times the electric chew 22 is opened in the auxiliary game is larger than in the non-short time state (FIG. 12). In other words, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the open count increase control for the electric chew 22. Under the situation where the game control microcomputer 81 is executing probability fluctuation control and fluctuation time reduction control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, and opening time extension control and opening frequency increase control for the electric chew 22, Compared to the case where these controls are not executed, the electric chew 22 is frequently opened, and the game balls are frequently won at the second starting port 21. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of shot balls, becomes high. Therefore, a state in which these controls are executed is referred to as a “high base state”, and a state in which these controls are not executed is referred to as a “low base state”. In the high base state, it is possible to aim for a big hit without greatly reducing the hand-held game balls. The high base state is a state in which so-called electric support control (control to support winning at the second starting port 21 by the electric chew 22) is executed. The high base state (electric support control state) may not execute all the controls described above. That is, among the probability fluctuation control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, the open time extension control for the electric chew 22, and the open count increase control for the electric chew 22 It is only necessary that by executing one or more controls, the electric chew 22 can be opened more easily than when the control is not being performed. Further, the high base state (electric support control state) may be independently controlled without accompanying the time reduction state.

  In the gaming machine 1, the gaming state after the jackpot game by winning the planned V passing jackpot is a high probability state, a short time state, and a high base state if the player has passed the V area 39 during the jackpot game. . This gaming state is particularly referred to as a “highly accurate high base state” or a “highly accurate time-short state”. The high-accuracy base state ends when a special symbol variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (160 times in this case) or when the jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed. In addition, the game state after the jackpot game due to winning the non-passing jackpot is a normal probability state (non-high probability) unless the V area 39 is passed (almost never) during the jackpot game. State, ie, a low probability state), a short time state, and a high base state. This gaming state is particularly referred to as a “low accuracy high base state” and a “low accuracy time short state”. The low-accuracy base state is terminated when a special symbol variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times), or when the jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed. When the gaming machine 1 is played for the first time, the gaming state after power-on is a normal probability state, a non-time-short state, and a low base state (non-electric support control state). This gaming state is particularly referred to as a “low probability low base state”. The low probability low base state may be referred to as “normal game state” or “low probability non-short state (also simply referred to as non-short state)”. A state in which a special game (a jackpot game) is being executed is referred to as a “special game state (a jackpot game state)”. Furthermore, the state controlled to at least one of the high probability state and the high base state is referred to as a “specific game state”.

  In a high base state, such as a high-accuracy high-base state or a low-accuracy high-base state, it is possible to advance the game more advantageously when the game ball is advanced to the right game area 3B (FIG. 1) by hitting right. The electric support control makes it easier for the electric chew 22 to be opened than in the low base state, and it is easier to win the second starting port 21 than to win the first starting port 20. is there. For this reason, in the high base state, the player makes a right turn to win the game ball to the second starting port 21 while passing the game ball to the gate 28 which is a trigger for the normal symbol lottery. As a result, it is possible to obtain a large number of start prizes (win prizes at the start opening) rather than left-handed. Note that the gaming machine 1 plays a right-handed game even during a big hit game. On the other hand, in the low base state, it is possible to advance the game more advantageously by making the game ball enter the left game area 3A (FIG. 1) by left-handed. Since the electric support control is not executed, the electric chew 22 is less likely to be opened than in the high base state, and it is easier to win the first start port 20 than to win the second start port 21. It is because it has become. For this reason, in the low base state, the player makes a left turn to win the game ball at the first start port 20. As a result, it is possible to obtain a larger number of start prizes than right-handed.

6). Operation of Game Control Microcomputer 81 The operation of the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 (FIG. 3) will be described with reference to FIGS. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, and the like that appear in the description of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the main RAM 84. The game control microcomputer 81 corresponds to the success / failure determination means (FIG. 23) and the prior / failure determination means (FIGS. 18 and 19).

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the main control main process. When the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 reads a program for executing main control main processing from the main ROM 83. In the main control main process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs an initial setting (step S001). In the initial setting, for example, the main CPU 82 is set, various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are reset. The initial value of the flag is “0”, that is, “OFF”, the initial value of the status is “1”, and the initial value of the counter is “0”. The initial setting is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter.

  After the initial setting, the game control microcomputer 81 prohibits interruption of interrupt processing (step S002), and performs normal symbol / special symbol main random number update processing (step S003). In this normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs various random number counter values (big hit random number value, big hit type random number value, reach random number value, fluctuation pattern random number value shown in FIG. 7A). , Normal symbol random value) is added and updated. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to “0” and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than “0” or may be changed randomly. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit including a counter IC or the like.

  After the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 permits interruption of the interruption process (step S004). While the interrupt is permitted, the main timer interrupt process (step S005) can be executed. The main-side timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the main CPU 82 at a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec cycle). That is, the main-side timer interrupt process is executed every predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec cycle). Then, after the main-side timer interrupt processing is completed and until the main-side timer interrupt processing is started next, update processing of various counter values by normal symbol / special symbol main random number update processing is repeatedly executed. . When an interrupt pulse is input to the main CPU 82 in the interrupt disabled state, the main timer interrupt processing is not started immediately but is started after the interrupt is permitted.

[Main timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the main-side timer interrupt process (FIG. 15: step S005). In the main timer interrupt process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs a random number update process (step S101). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 updates various random number counter values shown in FIG. This random number update processing is the same as the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update processing performed in the main control main processing (FIG. 15) described above. In other words, the update processing of various random number counter values includes the execution period of the main timer interrupt process and other periods (the period from the end of the main timer interrupt process until the start of the next main timer interrupt process) And both.

  After the random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs an input process (step S102). In the input process, the gaming control microcomputer 81 reads detection signals detected by various sensors attached to the gaming machine 1 and outputs payout data for paying out a winning ball according to the type of winning opening to the output of the main RAM 84. Set to buffer. The various sensors include, for example, a first start opening sensor 20a, a second start opening sensor 21a, a first big winning opening sensor 30a, a second big winning opening sensor 35a, a normal winning opening sensor 27a, and a normal winning opening sensor 29a (see FIG. 3).

  After the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 starts the start port sensor detection process (step S103), normal operation process (step S104), special operation process (step S105), V region sensor detection process (step S106), holding ball. Number processing (step S107) is executed in order. Details of these processes will be described later. After the reserved ball number processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs output processing (step S108). In the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the command set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 in each process described above to the sub-control board 90. After the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processes (step S109). In the other processing, for example, the second special figure holding indicator 43b is controlled to display the number based on the number of special figure 2 reserved balls described later, and the first special figure is displayed based on the number of special figure 1 reserved balls. The hold indicator 43a is controlled to a display mode indicating the number.

[Starting port sensor detection processing]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the start port sensor detection process (FIG. 16: Step S103). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201). This determination is made based on whether or not a game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a. When the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (step S201: NO), the process skips to step S205. When the game ball passes through the gate 28 (step S201: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of normal symbol reserved balls is “4 (upper limit value)” (step S202). The number of normal symbol reservation balls is the number of general symbol reservations, and more specifically, the value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 that counts the number of general symbol reservations. If the number of normal symbol reserved balls is “4” (step S202: YES), the process skips to step S205. When the number of normal symbol reserved balls is “3” or less (step S202: NO), “1” is added to the number of normal symbol reserved balls (step S203), and then a normal symbol random number acquisition process is performed (step S204). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 obtains the value of the normal symbol random number counter (FIG. 7: the value of label-TRND-H), and uses the obtained random number value as the first to first reserved memory areas 86 of the main RAM 84. The fourth storage area is stored in a storage area corresponding to the current number of normal symbol reserved balls.

  In step S <b> 205, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a game ball has won the second start port 21. This determination is made based on whether or not a game ball is detected by the second start port sensor 21a. When the game ball has not won the second start port 21 (step S205: NO), the process skips to step S210. When the game ball wins (step S205: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the special figure 2 reserved ball number is “4 (upper limit value)” (step S206). The special figure 2 reserved ball number is the number of second special figure reserved, more specifically, the value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 for counting the number of second special figure reserved. If the special figure 2 reserved ball number is “4” (step S206: YES), the process skips to step S210. When the special figure 2 reserved ball number is “3” or less (step S206: NO), “1” is added to the special figure 2 reserved ball number (step S207), and then a special figure 2 related random number acquisition process is performed (step S207). S208). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter (FIG. 7: value of label-TRND-A), the value of jackpot type random number counter (FIG. 7: value of label-TRND-AS), the value of reach random number counter (FIG. 7: label) -TRND-RC value) and the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (FIG. 7: label-TRND-T1 value). The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random value group in the storage area corresponding to the current number of reserved figure 2 reserved balls among the first to fourth storage areas of the second figure reserved storage area 85b. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily stores the acquired random value group in a buffer (preliminary determination buffer) different from the second special figure hold storage area 85b for the special figure 2 preliminary determination process (FIG. 18) described later. Memorize (hold). After the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special figure 2 preliminary determination process (step S209). Details of the special figure 2 preliminary determination process will be described later.

  In step S <b> 210, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a game ball has won the first start port 20. This determination is made based on whether or not a game ball is detected by the first start port sensor 20a. When the game ball has not won the first start port 20 (step S210: NO), this process ends. When a game ball wins the first starting port 20 (step S210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the special figure 1 reserved ball number is “4 (upper limit value)” ( Step S211). The special figure 1 reserved ball number is the number of the first special figure hold, more specifically, the value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 for counting the number of the first special figure hold. If the special figure 1 reserved ball number is “4” (step S211: YES), this process is terminated. When the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is equal to or less than “3” (step S211: NO), after adding “1” to the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (step S212), a special figure 1 related random number acquisition process is performed (step S212). S213). Here, similarly to the above-described special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (step S208), the value of the jackpot random number counter, the value of the jackpot type random number counter, the value of the reach random number counter, and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter are acquired. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random value group in a storage area corresponding to the current number of reserved figure 1 reserved balls among the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily stores the acquired random value group in a buffer (preliminary determination buffer) different from the first special figure holding storage area 85a for the special figure 1 preliminary determination process (FIG. 19) described later. Memorize (hold). After the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special figure 1 preliminary determination process (step S214). Details of the special figure 1 pre-determination process will be described later.

[Special Figure 2 Prior Judgment Processing]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the special figure 2 preliminary determination process (FIG. 17: step S209). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S301). When the probability variation flag is OFF (step S301: NO), this process ends. That is, when the probability variation flag is OFF, no prior determination is performed. On the other hand, when the probability variation flag is ON, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the high probability state table in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) and makes a jackpot advance determination (step S302). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the predetermination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). To do. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 makes a prior determination as to whether or not the game is a big hit using the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to be referenced and the jackpot random number value. Here, since the high probability state (probability change flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 uses the high probability state table (the jackpot determination value is “0” to “649”) in the jackpot determination table T1. It is judged beforehand whether it is a big hit with reference. That is, when the jackpot random number value is “0” to “649”, it is preliminarily determined as “big hit”, and when it is any other value, it is preliminarily determined as “lost”. In this embodiment, prior determination is performed using a jackpot determination table T1 used in jackpot determination processing (FIG. 23) described later. However, as another embodiment, for prior determination different from the jackpot determination table T1. The prior determination may be performed using the jackpot determination table.

  When the result of the big hit prior determination is “losing” (step S304: NO), the process skips to step S306. On the other hand, when the result of the jackpot prior determination is “big hit” (step S304: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the jackpot type prior determination (step S305). In the jackpot type prior determination, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines the jackpot type random number value as the determination value temporarily stored in the prior determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). To get. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 makes a prior determination of the jackpot type based on the acquired jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). Here, even if the jackpot type random number value is “0” to “127”, it is pre-determined as “16RV expected jackpot”. In this embodiment, prior determination is performed using the jackpot type determination table T5 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) described later. However, as another embodiment, the advance determination is different from the jackpot type determination table T5. Prior determination may be performed using a jackpot type determination table for determination.

  In step S306, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a change pattern advance determination. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 firstly includes a variation pattern random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the prior determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). And the reach random value is acquired. Next, here, since the time-short state (the time-short flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the time-short state variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11), the jackpot advance determination result of step S304, The fluctuation pattern is specified from the reach presence / absence prior determination result obtained from the reach random number value and the fluctuation pattern random value. In the variation pattern determination table T6 in FIG. 11, the variation pattern selected may differ depending on the number of reserved balls. Here, it is assumed that all variation patterns that may be selected depending on the number of reserved balls are selected. For example, from the jackpot advance determination result and the reach presence / absence determination result, a loss with reach is determined in advance, and the random number value of the variation pattern is “60”, the game control microcomputer 81 has a reserved ball count of “1-2 ", The variation pattern" P64 "to be selected, and if the number of reserved balls is" 3 to 4 ", the variation pattern" P68 "to be selected is selected. In the present embodiment, prior determination is performed using a variation pattern determination table T6 used in a variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25) described later. However, as another embodiment, a variation pattern determination table T6 is used. Pre-determination may be performed using a variation pattern determination table for pre-determination different from the above.

  In step S307, the game control microcomputer 81 creates a prior determination command. The pre-determination command includes a jackpot pre-determination result, a jackpot type pre-determination result in the case of winning, and a variation pattern pre-determination result. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the created prior determination command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S308), and ends this process.

[Special Figure 1 Pre-judgment process]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the special figure 1 preliminary determination process (FIG. 17: step S214). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S401). Contrary to the above-described special figure 2 pre-determination process, when the probability variation flag is ON (step S401: YES), this process ends. That is, when the probability variation flag is ON, the prior determination is not performed. On the other hand, when the probability variation flag is OFF (step S401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 makes a jackpot advance determination with reference to the normal probability state table in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step). S402). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the prior determination buffer by the special figure 1 related random number acquisition processing (FIG. 17: step S213). To do. Next, since the normal probability state (the probability variation flag is OFF) here, the game control microcomputer 81 uses the normal probability state table (the jackpot determination value is “0” to “164” in the jackpot determination table T1). )) To determine whether or not it is a big hit. That is, when the jackpot random number value is “0” to “164”, it is preliminarily determined as “big hit”, and when it is any other value, it is preliminarily determined as “lost”. The jackpot prior determination may use a jackpot determination table for prior determination different from the jackpot determination table T1. Hereinafter, the processes in steps S404 to S408 are the same as steps S304 to S308 in the above-described special figure 2 preliminary determination process (FIG. 18), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

[Normal operation processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the normal operation process (FIG. 16: step S104). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the electric chew 22 is operating (step S501). If the electric chew 22 is operating (step S501: YES), the process proceeds to step S520. When the electric chew 22 is not operating (step S501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol is changing (step S502). If the normal symbol is changing (step S502: YES), the process skips to step S508. When the normal symbol is not changing (step S502: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of retained balls of the normal symbol is “0” (step S503). When the number of reserved balls is “0” (step S503: YES), this process ends. When the number of reserved balls is 1 or more (step S503: NO), the number of normal symbol held balls is decremented by 1 (step S504). Accordingly, when a game ball passes through the gate 28 in a state where the number of held balls of the normal symbol is “0”, the number of held balls of the normal symbol is once “1” in step S203 of the start port sensor detection process (FIG. 17). After that, the hold is digested in this step S504, and the number of held balls of the normal symbol immediately becomes “0”. The same applies to the number of reserved balls for special symbols. That is, in step S207 and step S212 of the start port sensor detection process (FIG. 17), the number of special symbols held temporarily becomes “1”, and thereafter, step S1404 and step in the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) described later. In S1410, the reservation is digested and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol becomes “0”. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a hit determination with reference to the normal symbol hit determination table T3 (FIG. 8C) (step S505). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 firstly sets a normal symbol random number value (as a determination value) stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the general figure hold storage area) of the general figure hold storage area 86. Per random number). Then, the normal symbol random number value, the gaming state (whether or not it is in the short time state), and the normal symbol hit determination table T3 are used to determine whether or not it is a hit. For example, when the normal symbol random number is “0” to “2” in the non-time-short state, it is determined as “winning”, and when the normal symbol random number is other than that, it is determined as “lost”. (See FIG. 8C).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern with reference to the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 8D) (step S506). Specifically, the gaming control microcomputer 81 first determines the gaming state (whether or not it is a short-time state), and uses the gaming state determination result and the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 to change the normal symbol variation. The variation time of the normal symbol as a pattern is selected. Here, in the non-short-time state, the variation time of the normal symbol is determined as “30 seconds”, and in the short-time state, the variation time of the normal symbol is determined as “1 second” (see FIG. 8D). . The game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected normal symbol variation pattern to start normal symbol variation display (step S507).

  In step S508, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol variation time has ended. The variation time of the normal symbol is the variation time selected in step S506 (see FIG. 8D). When the variation time has not ended (step S508: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. That is, the normal symbol variation display is continued. On the other hand, when the variation time has ended (step S508: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 stops the variation display (step S509), and in the case of “losing” in the above-described hit determination (step S505). (Step S510: NO), this process is finished. On the other hand, if the winning determination is “win” (step S510: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets an electric chew release pattern (step S511). The open pattern of the electric chew 22 is selected with reference to the electric chew open pattern determination table T7 (FIG. 12A). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines a game state (whether or not it is a short time state), and uses the game state determination result and the electric chew release pattern determination table T7 to open the electric chew 22 release pattern. Select. Here, “open pattern 11” is selected in the non-time saving state, and “open pattern 12” is selected in the time saving state. After the selection of the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 starts the electric chew operation so as to follow the selected opening pattern (step S512), and ends the present process.

  In step S501 described above, when the electric chew 22 is operating (step S501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520). The closing condition here is that the number of winnings to the electric chew 22 has reached a prescribed maximum winning number (for example, six), or the operation time of the electric chew 22 has elapsed and the electric chew 22 is closed. One of the things that has been achieved is fulfilled. The operating time of the electric chew 22 is an operating time corresponding to the opening pattern selected in step S511. If the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is not satisfied (step S520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (closes) the electric chew 22 and stops its operation (step S521). Finish.

[Special action processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the special operation process (FIG. 16: step S105). Here, the processing related to the special symbol display device 41 and the special prize winning device (the first big prize winning device 31 and the second big prize winning device 36) is divided into four stages, and each stage is set to “1” of “special operation status”, Called “2”, “3”, “4”. When the “special operation status” is “1” (step S1301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special symbol standby process (step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, jackpot determination, variation pattern selection, and the like are executed. When the “special operation status” is “2” (step S1301: NO, step S1303: YES), special symbol variation processing is performed (step S1304). In the special symbol variation processing, the variation stop command is output after the variation time has elapsed. When the “special operation status” is “3” (steps S1301, S1303: NO, step S1305: YES), special symbol determination processing is performed (step S1306). In the special symbol confirmation process, an output of an opening command or the like is executed at a big hit. When the “special operation status” is “4” (steps S1301, S1303, S1305: NO), the special electric accessory processing is performed (step S1308). In the special electric accessory processing, a big hit game is executed. Details of each of the above processes will be described later. The special operation status is “1” in the initial setting.

[Special symbol standby processing]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21: Step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 reserved ball number is “0” (step S1401). When the special figure 2 reserved ball number is “0” (step S1401: YES), that is, in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, the random value group acquired due to the winning to the second starting port 21 is stored. If there is no memory, the process proceeds to step S1407. When the special figure 2 reserved ball number is “1” or more (step S1401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes a jackpot determination process (step S1402) and a variation pattern selection process (step S1403). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the special figure 2 reserved ball number is decremented by one (step S1404). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the storage location of the hold information (various random values) stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure hold storage area 85b to the side read from the current position. While shifting by one, the hold information stored in the place farthest from the read side in the second special figure hold storage area 85b is cleared (step S1405). For example, when the hold information is stored in the first to third storage areas, the hold information stored in the third storage area is cleared, and the hold information is stored in the first to fourth storage areas. If so, the hold information stored in the fourth storage area is cleared. According to the above steps, the second special figure hold is digested in the order in which it was put on hold. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold image 9B (the leftmost hold image 9B among the four hold images 9B) corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b is displayed. It shifts to the reserved digested image display area side and is displayed as the reserved digested image 9C. In addition, the reserved images 9B corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b (the second, third and fourth reserved images 9B from the left among the four reserved images 9B) are on the left side, respectively. Shift one (FIG. 1). Thereby, the player can recognize that one second special figure reservation has been consumed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step S1406). In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process, a fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started, and a fluctuation time timer is set. The variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process is set in the variation time timer. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to “2”. The fluctuation start command (special figure 2 fluctuation start command) set in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process includes information on the special figure stop symbol data set in the jackpot determination process (step S1402) and the fluctuation pattern selection process ( Information regarding the variation pattern set in step S1403) (including information regarding the variation time) is included.

  In step S1401, when the special figure 2 reserved ball number is "0" (step S1401: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the special figure 1 reserved ball number is "0" ( Step S1407). In the case where the special figure 1 reserved ball number is “0” (step S1407: YES), that is, the random number value group acquired due to the winning to the first start port 20 in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a. If there is no memory, the process proceeds to step S1413. When the special figure 1 reserved ball number is “1” or more (step S1407: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes a jackpot determination process (step S1408) and a variation pattern selection process (step S1409). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is decremented by one (step S1410). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage location of various random number values stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a by one to the side read from the current position. At the same time, the hold information stored in a place farthest from the read side in the first special figure hold storage area 85a is cleared (step S1411). By the above steps, the first special figure hold is digested in the order in which it was put on hold. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold image 9A (the rightmost hold image 9A among the four hold images 9A) corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a is displayed. It shifts to the reserved digest image display area side and is displayed as the reserved digest image 9C. Also, the reserved images 9A (the second, third and fourth reserved images 9A from the left among the four reserved images 9A) corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a are on the right side, respectively. Shift one (FIG. 1). Thereby, the player can recognize that one 1st special figure reservation was digested. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step S1412). In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, a fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started and the fluctuation time timer is set. The variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process is set in the variation time timer. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to “2” (step S1406). Note that the fluctuation start command (special figure 1 fluctuation start command) set in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process includes information on the special figure stop symbol data set in the jackpot determination process (step S1408) and a fluctuation pattern selection process ( Information regarding the variation pattern set in step S1409) (including information regarding the variation time) is included.

  In step S1407, if the special figure 1 reserved ball number is “0” (step S1407: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is a standby screen (step S1407). S1413). The standby screen is a demonstration screen for waiting for customers. For example, the game control microcomputer 81 may make the determination based on ON / OFF of a demo screen display flag for waiting for a customer. If it is a standby screen (step S1413: YES), this process ends. If it is not a standby screen (step S1413: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets a customer standby standby command for displaying a standby scene in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 after a predetermined standby time has elapsed. (Step S1414) This processing is finished. As described above, according to the special symbol standby process of the present embodiment, the special symbol variation display based on the first special figure hold is executed only when the second special figure hold is “0”. That is, the digestion of the second special figure hold is executed in preference to the digestion of the first special figure hold. Further, according to the jackpot type determination table T5 of the present embodiment, the lottery based on the second special figure hold has a larger profit for the player than the lottery based on the first special figure hold (V pass planned jackpot). It is easier to win.

[Big hit judgment processing]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 22: steps S1402 and S1408). The jackpot determination process (step S1402) in FIG. 2 and the jackpot determination process (step S1408) in FIG. 1 are the same in processing flow, and will be described together. In the jackpot determination process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S1501). When the probability variation flag is ON (step S1501: YES), the jackpot determination is performed with reference to the high probability state table in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S1502). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a jackpot random number value as a determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process in FIG. 2, the jackpot random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one in the second special chart hold area) 85b is read. In the jackpot determination process of FIG. 1, the jackpot random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special chart hold) of the first special figure hold storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is a big hit using the jackpot determination table T1 to be referred to and the jackpot random number value. Here, since it is a high probability state (the probability variation flag is ON), it is determined whether or not the jackpot is based on the table for the high probability state (the jackpot determination value is “0” to “649”) in the jackpot determination table T1. judge.

  When the probability variation flag is OFF in step S1501 (step S1501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a jackpot determination with reference to the normal probability state table in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) ( Step S1504). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads the jackpot random number value by the same method as in step S1502. Next, since the normal probability state (probability change flag is OFF) here, whether the big hit is based on the normal probability state table (the big hit determination value is “0” to “164”) in the big hit determination table T1 Determine whether or not.

  When the result of the jackpot determination is “big hit” (steps S1503, S1505: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the jackpot flag (step S1506) and determines the jackpot type (step S1507). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a jackpot type random number value as a determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process in FIG. 2, the jackpot type random number value stored in the first storage area of the second special chart holding storage area 85b is read. In the jackpot determination process of FIG. 1, the jackpot type random number value stored in the first storage area of the first special chart holding storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the jackpot type based on the read jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). After determining the jackpot type, the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9) corresponding to the specified jackpot type is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S1503 or step S1505, if the result of the big hit determination is “lost”, the special figure stop symbol data (01H) corresponding to the lost symbol is set in the big hit type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520). This process is terminated.

[Variation pattern selection processing]
24 and 25 are flowcharts of the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 22: steps S1403 and S1409). The variation pattern selection process (step S1403) in FIG. 2 and the variation pattern selection process (step S1409) in FIG. 1 have the same process flow and will be described together. In the variation pattern selection process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game state is a short time state (step S1600). The determination as to whether or not the time is short is made depending on whether or not the time flag is ON. If the time is short (step S1600: YES), the process proceeds to step S1612. If it is not the time saving state (step S1600: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the big hit flag is ON (step S1602). When the big hit flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the process proceeds to step S1607. When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot is special figure 2 (step S1603). If the jackpot is special figure 2 (step S1603: YES), the jackpot type is always a V passing planned jackpot, so the process skips to step S1605. When the jackpot is special figure 1 (step S1603: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot type is a V passing planned jackpot (step S1604), and the jackpot type determination is set in the main RAM 84. This is done based on the special figure stop symbol data.

  When the jackpot type is a V passing planned jackpot (step S1604: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 changes with reference to the table for the non-time-saving state V passing scheduled jackpot in the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). A pattern is selected (step S1605). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a variation pattern random value as a determination value. For example, in the variation pattern selection process of FIG. 2, the variation pattern random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the second special figure reservation storage area) 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection process of FIG. 1, the variation pattern random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure reservation) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table T6 and the variation pattern random number value. Here, as the table for the non-time-short state V passing expected jackpot, the portion corresponding to the V-passing expected jackpot in the non-time-short state variation pattern determination table T6 shown in FIG. ”To“ P3 ”, and in FIG. 2, the variation pattern“ P21 ”to“ P23 ”) is referred to (the address is set). From the read variation pattern random value, any one of “P1” to “P3” is selected as the variation pattern in the special figure 1 and any one of “P21” to “P23” in the special figure 2.

  When the jackpot type is a V non-passing expected jackpot (step S1604: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for the non-short-time state V non-passing scheduled jackpot in the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). Then, the variation pattern is selected (step S1606). Here, as the table for the non-time-short state V non-passing expected jackpot, the portion corresponding to the V non-passing jackpot (“P4” to “P6”) in the non-time-short state variation pattern determination table T6 shown in FIG. Part). One of “P4” to “P6” is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random value.

  If the jackpot flag is OFF in step S1602 (step S1602: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the reach random number value is a reach establishment random number value (step S1607). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a reach random number value as a determination value. In the variation pattern selection process of FIG. 2, the reach random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the second special figure hold) of the second special figure hold storage area 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection process of FIG. 1, the reach random number value stored in the first storage area of the first special figure holding storage area 85a (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure holding) is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the presence or absence of reach using the reach determination table T2 (FIG. 8B) and the reach random number value. Here, since it is a non-short-time state, the reach determination table T2 is based on the table for the non-time-short state (reach presence determination value (reach establishment random number value is a portion from “0” to “13”)). Determine presence or absence.

  When the reach random number value is a reach establishment random number value (step S1607: YES), that is, when the reach is lost, the game control microcomputer 81 is in a non-short-time state in the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). A variation pattern is selected with reference to the reach loss table (step S1608). Here, as the table for non-short-time state reach loss, the portion corresponding to the reach-less loss in the non-time-short state change pattern determination table T6 shown in FIG. 10 (in FIG. 1, the change pattern is “P7”- Reference is made to the “P14” portion, and in FIG. 2 the fluctuation pattern “P24” to “P31” portion). In the special figure 1, any one of “P7” to “P14” is selected as a fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random number value and the current special figure 1 reserved ball number (1 to 4). In the special figure 2, any one of “P24” to “P31” is selected as a fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random number value and the current special figure 2 reserved ball number (1 to 4). Since the variation pattern to be selected changes depending on the number of reserved balls, a function of shortening variation according to the number of reserved balls is activated. That is, in both of FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, when the number of reserved balls is “3” to “4”, the variation time is longer than that when the number of reserved balls is “1” to “2”. More short variation patterns are selected. Thereby, when there are many reservation balls, the digestion speed of special figure reservation can be accelerated.

  When the reach random number value is not the reach establishment random number value (step S1607: NO), that is, in the case of no reach reach, the game control microcomputer 81 is in the non-short-time state in the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). A variation pattern is selected with reference to the table for losing without reach (step S1609). Here, as the table for non-short-time state non-reach loss, the portion corresponding to the non-reach-time loss in the non-time-short state change pattern determination table T6 shown in FIG. Reference is made to the “P16” portion, and in FIG. 2, the variation pattern “P32” to “P33” portion. In FIG. 1, either “P15” or “P16” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random number value and the current special figure 1 reserved ball number (1 to 4). In the special figure 2, either “P32” or “P33” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random number value and the current special figure 2 reserved ball number (1 to 4). Again, since the selected variation pattern changes depending on the number of reserved balls, a shortening variation function according to the number of retained balls is activated.

  If it is determined in step S1600 that the gaming state is the short-time state, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (FIG. 25: step S1612). Hereinafter, the processing of steps S1613 to S1619 is the same as the processing of steps S1603 to S1609 described above except for the following points, and thus description thereof is omitted. The difference between the processing of steps S1613 to S1619 and the processing of steps S1603 to S1609 is that in step S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, the portion of the variation pattern determination table T6 referred to is already described in steps S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609. And different. Specifically, in S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609, the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) for the non-short-time state is referred to, whereas in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, the short-time state is used. The fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) is referred to. For example, in the case of step S1615, that is, when the jackpot type is the expected V passing jackpot, the portion corresponding to the expected V passing jackpot in the variation pattern determination table T6 for the short time state shown in FIG. Is referred to as “P41” to “P43”, and in FIG. From the read fluctuation pattern random value, any one of “P41” to “P43” is selected as the fluctuation pattern in the special figure 1 and any one of “P61” to “P63” in the special figure 2. Further, for example, in the case of step S1616, that is, when the jackpot type is a planned V non-passing jackpot, the portion corresponding to the planned non-passing jackpot in the short-time state variation pattern determination table T6 shown in FIG. 11 (“P44 ”To“ P46 ”). One of “P44” to “P46” is selected as a variation pattern from the read variation pattern random value.

  After selecting the variation pattern as described above, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected variation pattern (step S1630) and ends the process. The set variation pattern information is included in the variation start command and transmitted to the sub-control board 90 in the output process (FIG. 16: step S108). Thereby, the change display of the special symbol is started.

[Special symbol change processing]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the special symbol changing process (FIG. 21: step S1304). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the special symbol variation time has elapsed (step S1701). The special symbol variation time is a variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25) described above. If the fluctuation time has not ended (step S1701: NO), this process ends. That is, the special symbol variation display started in step S1406 or S1412 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) is continued. On the other hand, if the variation time has ended (step S1701: YES), a variation stop command is set (step S1702), and the special operation status is set to “3” (step S1703). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing associated with the change stop (step S1704). For example, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a process of stopping the change display of the special symbol at a symbol corresponding to the set special symbol stop symbol data. Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this processing.

[Special symbol confirmation processing]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the special symbol confirmation process (FIG. 21: step S1306). The game control microcomputer 81 first performs a game state management process (step S1801). The game state management process is a process for managing the number of STs and the number of time reductions, and the contents will be described later. After the game state management process, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802). If the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1802: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to “1” (step S1808), and ends this process. As a result, the jackpot game is not started, and the process shifts to the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) again, and the jackpot determination for the next hold is executed.

  If the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the winning pattern and the opening / closing pattern of the V opening / closing member according to the type of winning jackpot (step S1803). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the special winning opening opening pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 13), determines the opening pattern of the special winning opening from the special figure stop symbol data, and determines the determined opening pattern. set. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is “11H”, “open pattern 21” is set as the open pattern of the special winning opening. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9 (FIG. 14), determines the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 from the special figure stop symbol data, and sets the determined opening pattern. . For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is “11H”, “open pattern 31” is set as the open pattern of the V opening / closing member 71. The value of the round counter is set to the number of rounds corresponding to the type of winning jackpot together with the set of the winning pattern and the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member. The round counter counts the number of unit open games (round games) executed during the jackpot game. Here, “16” is set in the round counter (FIG. 13B).

  After the opening pattern is set, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a game state reset process (step S1804). The game state reset process is a process for resetting (returning to OFF) the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag, and the contents will be described later. After the gaming state reset process, in order to start the jackpot game, a jackpot opening command is set (step S1805), and the opening is started (step S1806). Thereafter, the special operation status is set to “4” (step S1807), and this process is finished.

[Game state management processing]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the game state management process (FIG. 27: step S1801). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S2001). If the probability variation flag is OFF (step S2001: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the probability variation flag is ON (step S2001: YES), the value of the probability variation counter is decremented by 1 (step S2002). The probability variation counter counts the number of times the special symbol is changed during the high probability state. Here, “160” is set in the probability variation counter at the time of transition to the high probability state. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become “0” as a result of decrementing the probability variation counter by 1 (step S2003). If the value of the probability variation counter is not “0” (step S2003: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the value of the probability variation counter is “0” (step S2003: YES), the probability variation flag is switched to OFF (step S2004).

  In step S2005, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time reduction flag is ON. When the time reduction flag is OFF (step S2005: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the time reduction flag is ON (step S2005: YES), the value of the time reduction counter is decremented by 1 (step S2006). The time reduction counter counts the number of times the special symbol is changed during the time reduction state. Here, at the time of shifting to the time-short state, “100” is set in the time-short counter if the low-accuracy base state is set, and “160” is set in the time-short counter if the base state is high-accuracy. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become “0” as a result of decrementing the hourly counter by 1 (step S2007). If the value of the time reduction counter is not “0” (step S2007: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the value of the hour / hour counter is “0” (step S2007: YES), the hour / hour flag is switched to OFF (step S2008).

  In step S2009, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The gaming state designation command includes information on the current gaming state that has just been set (whether it is a certain change state, a certain change counter value, whether it is a short time state, a short time counter value, etc.).

[Game state reset processing]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the gaming state reset process (FIG. 27: step S1804). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S2101). If the probability variation flag is OFF (step S2101: NO), the process skips to step S2103. When the probability variation flag is ON (step S2101: YES), the probability variation flag is switched to OFF (step S2102). In step S2103, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time reduction flag is ON. If the time reduction flag is OFF (step S2103: NO), this process is terminated. When the time reduction flag is ON (step S2103: YES), the time reduction flag is switched to OFF (step S2104). In other words, during the execution of the jackpot game, it becomes a non-high probability state and a non-time-short state. Since the gaming machine 1 is always in the low base state during the non-short-time state, the gaming machine 1 is in the low base state while the jackpot game is being executed.

[Special electric material processing]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the special electric accessory process (FIG. 21: step S1308). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200). The “hit winning flag” is a flag that indicates that the opening of the big winning devices (the first big winning device 31 and the second big winning device 36) based on the release pattern has been completed in the running big hit game. If the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the process proceeds to step S2230. When the big hit end flag is OFF (step S2200: NO), V opening / closing member operation processing for operating the V opening / closing member 71 is performed (step S2201). The V opening / closing member 71 according to the present embodiment is configured to operate when a predetermined number of game balls have won the first grand prize opening 30. When the predetermined game ball is won, the V opening / closing member 71 is opened for a predetermined period. Details of the V opening / closing member operation processing will be described later. After the V opening / closing member operation process, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the big prize opening (the first big prize opening 30 and the second big prize opening 35) is open (step S2202). If it is open (step S2202: YES), the process proceeds to step S2210.

  If the special winning opening is not open (step S2202: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is time (timing) to open the special winning opening (step S2203). For example, when the time for opening the jackpot has passed and the opening time of the first round game has been reached, or when the time for opening the grand prize opening is reached, the grand prize opening that was temporarily closed after the opening is opened again This includes the time when the interval time (closing time) until has elapsed and the time for opening again is reached. If it is not time to open the big prize opening (step S2203: NO), the process proceeds to step S2220.

  When it is time (timing) for opening the big winning opening (step S2203: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a big winning opening process (step S2207). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the big winning opening (the first big winning opening 30 or the second big winning opening 35) according to the opening pattern (FIG. 13) according to the type of jackpot. After the big prize opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round designation command (step S2208). The round designation command includes information on the number of rounds of the jackpot game being executed, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the output buffer of the main RAM 84. In the present embodiment, a large winning opening is not opened a plurality of times during one round game. However, as another embodiment, in the case where a large number of winning holes are opened during a single round game, the gaming control microcomputer 81 is configured so that the opening of the large winning opening is in one round. It may be determined whether or not it is the first release, and the round designation command may be set only in the case of the first release. After setting the round designation command, this process is finished.

  In the above-described step S2202, when the special winning opening is being opened (step S2202: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the special winning opening closing condition is satisfied (step S2210). The closing condition here is that the number of winning prizes in the round winning game in the round game has reached a prescribed maximum winning quantity (for example, 9 per round), or the time for closing the big winning opening. (That is, a predetermined opening time (FIG. 13) has elapsed since the opening of the special winning opening). If the closing condition for the special winning opening is not satisfied (step S2210: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the special winning opening is established (step S2210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (closes) the special winning opening (step S2211).

  If it is not the time (timing) for opening the big winning opening in the above-described step S2203, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2220). Here, one round ends after a predetermined time (in this case, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the grand prize opening was closed. This is because the closing time (interval time) of the big prize opening between round games is included in the open round game before the closing as described above. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is over depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time has elapsed since the closing of the special winning opening. If the round game has not ended (step S2220: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

  When the round game has ended (step S2220: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round counter value to 1 decrement (step S2221), and determines whether or not the round counter value is “0”. A determination is made (step S2226). If the value of the round counter is not “0” (step S2226: NO), that is, if the prescribed number of round games has not been consumed yet, the present process is terminated to start the next round game. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter is “0”, the jackpot ending command is set as a jackpot ending process for ending the jackpot game (step S2227), and the jackpot ending is started (step S2228). In the present embodiment, the ending time (for example, 18 seconds) when a game ball has passed to the V region 39 with “16R (substantially 13R) V passing expected jackpot” is “16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled It is the same length as the ending time when there is no game ball passing to the V region 39 in the “big hit”. As a result, even if the player has passed the game ball to the V region 39 with the “16R (substantially 13R) V expected to pass big hit”, the “16R (substantially 13R) V non-passed expected big hit It can be recognized that the game ball has not passed through the V region 39. It should be noted that the ending time when the game ball does not pass through the V area 39 in the “16R (substantially 13R) V passing expected jackpot” is also the same length as these. After the start of the jackpot ending, the jackpot end flag is set to ON (step S2229), and the process is terminated.

  In the above-described step S2200, when the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), since the final round has ended, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot ending time has elapsed. (Step S2230). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2230: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the ending time has elapsed (step S2230: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the jackpot end flag (step S2231), turns off the jackpot flag (step S2232), and displays a special operation status. Is set to "1" (step S2233). As a result, the special symbol standby process (step S1302) is executed again in the next special operation process. Thereafter, a game state setting process (step S2234), which will be described later, is executed, and this process ends.

[V opening / closing member operation processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the V opening / closing member operation process (FIG. 30: step S2201). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the current round game (the round) is an open round of the V opening / closing member 71 (step S2501). Here, the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, the eighth round, the tenth round, and the twelfth round correspond to the opening round of the V opening and closing member 71. The game control microcomputer 81 can determine that the round is an open round when the value of the round counter is “15”, “13”, “11”, “9”, “7”, “5”. When it is not the open round of the V opening / closing member 71 (step S2501: NO), this process is finished. This is because it is not necessary to operate the V opening / closing member 71 in the round.

  If it is the open round of the V opening / closing member 71 (step S2501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the first winning flag is ON (step S2502). The “first winning flag” is a flag indicating that the first big winning opening 30 has won the first ball in the round. If the first winning flag is ON (step S2502: YES), the process proceeds to step S2520. When the first winning flag is OFF (step S2502: NO), it is determined whether or not the first ball winning is detected (step S2503). When the first ball winning is not detected (step S2503: NO), this process is finished. This is because there is no winning in the first big winning opening 30 in the round and it is not necessary to operate the V opening / closing member 71.

  When the first winning is detected (step S2503: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 opens the V opening / closing member 71 in a short circuit and performs a V valid period setting process (step S2504). The V opening / closing member 71 is short-opened in the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 (FIG. 14B), regardless of whether it is “short open” or “long open”. This is because sometimes a short opening (0.1 seconds in this case) is executed. Note that when the V opening / closing member 71 is short-circuited, the opening time of the V opening / closing member 71 is very short. Therefore, the first game ball won in the first big winning opening 30 does not pass through the V area 39 and is not It is configured to pass through the V region 70. In the V effective period setting process, a few seconds after the V opening / closing member 71 is opened and after the V opening / closing member 71 is closed are set to a V effective period in which the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is effective. Here, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the V opening / closing member 71 in a short circuit (here, 0.1 second) in accordance with the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 (FIG. 14B), and the V opening / closing member 71 is being opened. And 1 second after closing is set as the V effective period. The game control microcomputer 81 sets a period other than the V valid period (including when the jackpot game is not being executed) as a V invalid period for determining that the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is invalid. Here, “determining that the detection of the game ball by the V region sensor 39a is valid” means that the V flag is turned on based on the detection of the game ball by the V region sensor 39a (V region sensor detection described later). Processing (see FIG. 33)). Further, “determining that the detection of the game ball by the V region sensor 39a is invalid” means that the V flag is not turned ON even if the detection of the game ball by the V region sensor 39a. The reason why the V effective period includes a few seconds after the closing of the V opening / closing member 71 (ball brushing period) is because there is a physical distance between the V opening / closing member 71 and the V region sensor 39a. This is in consideration of a period until a game ball that has entered the V region 39 immediately before closing the V opening / closing member 71 is detected by the V region sensor 39a. That is, here, the V flag is turned ON only when the V passage during the V effective period (the passing of the game ball to the V area 39) is detected, and the V flag is detected when the V passage outside the V effective period (the V invalid period) is detected. It is supposed not to turn on. When the V flag is ON, the probability variation flag is turned ON, that is, the gaming state after the jackpot game is set to a high probability state (see the gaming state setting process (FIG. 32) described later). In this way, the V flag is turned on based on the passage of V due to fraud, so that the high probability state is not set. After the short opening of the V opening / closing member 71 and the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag ON (step S2505), and proceeds to step S2540.

  In step S2502, if the first winning flag is ON, that is, if the first ball has already been won (step S2502: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the second winning flag is ON. Is performed (step S2520). The “second winning flag” is a flag indicating that the first big winning opening 30 has won the second ball when the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 in the round is long open. If the second winning flag is ON (step S2520: YES), the process proceeds to step S2540. When the second winning flag is OFF (step S2520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the opening pattern of the V opening and closing member 71 in the round is long opening (step S2521). When it is not long open (step S2521: NO), that is, when it is short open, the process proceeds to step S2540. On the other hand, when it is long open (step S2521: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the second winning is detected (step S2522). When the second winning is not detected (step S2522: NO), the process proceeds to step S2540.

  When the second winning is detected (step S2522: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 opens the V opening / closing member 71 for a long time and performs a V valid period setting process (step S2523). The V opening / closing member 71 is opened long when the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 (FIG. 14 (B)) is “long opening” and the long opening is made when the second ball is won (here, a maximum of 31.5 seconds). ). In addition, since the maximum round game time here is 31.5 seconds (maximum winning opening maximum opening time 29.5 seconds + interval closing time 2 seconds), generally the second ball winning The time from the time to the end of the round is less than 31.5 seconds. As will be described later, since the V opening / closing member 71 is forcibly closed at the end of the round, the long opening time of the V opening / closing member 71 is shorter than 31.5 seconds. However, the long opening of the V opening / closing member 71 is because the opening time of the V opening / closing member 71 is relatively long, so that at least a part of the second and subsequent game balls won in the first big winning opening 30 will open the V region 39. It is configured to pass. In the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the V valid period when the V opening and closing member 71 is open, and sets the V invalid period along with the closing of the V open and closed member 71 at the end of the round. After the long opening of the V opening / closing member 71 and the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the second winning flag ON (step S2524), and proceeds to step S2540.

  In step S2540, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the V opening / closing member 71 is being opened. When the V opening / closing member 71 is open (step S2540: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2550). As described above, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time (2 seconds in this case) has elapsed since the closing of the special winning opening. Make a decision.

  When the round game has ended (step S2550: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2551), the V opening / closing member closing process, and the V ineffective period. Setting processing is performed (step S2552). Here, at the end of the round game, the game control microcomputer 81 forcibly closes the V opening / closing member 71, and after a few seconds (here, 1 second) has elapsed after the V opening / closing member 71 is closed, Set and finish this process.

  If the round game has not ended (step S2550: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the V opening / closing member 71 is satisfied (step S2560). The closing condition of the V opening / closing member 71 can be exemplified by a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second) elapses after the opening of the V opening / closing member 71 in the case of short opening, for example. When the closing condition is satisfied (step S2560: YES), the V opening / closing member closing process and the V invalid period setting process are performed (step S2552), and this process is finished. If the closing condition is not satisfied (step S2560: NO), the process is finished while the V opening / closing member 71 is in the open state and the V effective period is continued.

  In step S2540, when it is determined that the V opening / closing member 71 is closed (step S2540: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2571). If the round has ended (step S2571: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2572) and ends the process. If the round has not ended (step S2571: NO), the process ends.

[Game state setting process]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the gaming state setting process (FIG. 30: step S2234). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the V flag is ON (step S2301). If the V flag is OFF (step S2301: NO), the hour / hour flag is turned ON (step S2302), and “100” is set to the hour / hour counter (step S2303). As a result, the gaming state after the current jackpot game becomes a “non-high probability state”, a “short time state”, and a “high base state” (that is, a low probability high base). This low-accuracy base state is terminated when either of the special symbol variable display is performed 100 times or the next jackpot is won.

  On the other hand, if the V flag is ON in step S2301 (step S2301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the probability change flag (step S2304), sets “160” in the probability change counter (step S2305), The V flag is turned off (step S2306). Further, the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the time reduction flag (step S2307) and sets “160” in the time reduction counter (step S2308). As a result, the gaming state after the current jackpot game becomes a “high probability state”, a “time-short state”, and a “high base state” (that is, a highly accurate high base). This high-accuracy base state ends when either of the special symbol variable display is performed 160 times or the next jackpot is won.

  In step S2309, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The gaming state designation command includes information regarding the gaming state that has just been set.

[V-area sensor detection processing]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the V region sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S106). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not a game ball is detected by the V region sensor 39a (step S2601). If no game ball is detected by the V region sensor 39a (step S2601: NO), the process is terminated. On the other hand, when there is detection (step S2601: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is during the V effective period (step S2602). The V effective period is a period set by the V effective period setting process (steps S2504 and S2523) of the V opening / closing member operation process (FIG. 31). The V effective period is set to several seconds (ball break period) when the V opening / closing member 71 is opened or closed during the second, fourth, sixth, eighth, tenth, and twelfth rounds. Is done. If it is not during the V effective period (step S2602: NO), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is during the V effective period (step S2602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the V flag (step S2603), sets the V passing command (step S2604), and ends this process. .

[Reserved ball count processing]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the reserved ball number process (FIG. 16: step S107). The game control microcomputer 81 first reads the special figure 1 reserved ball number, the special figure 2 reserved ball number, and the normal symbol reserved ball number stored in the main RAM 84 (step S2701). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the reserved ball number command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2702). The reserved ball number command is a command for notifying the sub-control board 90 of the reserved ball number, and includes information on the special figure 1 reserved ball number, the special figure 2 reserved ball number, and the normal symbol reserved ball number. . After setting the held ball number command, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this processing.

7). Operation of Effect Control Microcomputer 91 The operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIGS. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, and the like that appear in the description of the operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the sub-RAM 94.

[Sub control main processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the sub-control main process. When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the effect control microcomputer 91 reads a program for executing the sub control main process from the sub ROM 93. In the sub-control main process, the production control microcomputer 91 first performs a CPU initialization process (step S4000). In the CPU initialization process, for example, setting of the sub CPU 92, resetting of various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are performed. The initial value of the flag is “0”, that is, “OFF”, the initial value of the status is “1”, and the initial value of the counter is “0”. The CPU initialization process is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter.

  After the CPU initialization process, the effect control microcomputer 91 prohibits interruption of the interruption process (step S4015) and performs a random number update process (step S4020). In this random number update process, the production control microcomputer 91 adds 1 to the random number counter value shown in FIG. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to “0” and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than “0” or may be changed randomly. In addition to adding one by one, two or more random numbers may be added. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number.

  After the random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 permits interruption of the interruption process (step S4025). While the interrupt is permitted, the sub timer interrupt process (step S4035) can be executed. The sub-side timer interrupt process is executed based on interrupt pulses that are repeatedly input to the sub CPU 92 at a predetermined cycle. That is, the sub timer interruption process is executed at predetermined intervals. Then, the random number update process is repeatedly executed after the sub timer interrupt process is completed and before the next sub timer interrupt process is started.

[Sub timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the sub timer interruption process (FIG. 35: step S4035). The effect control microcomputer 91 first performs a received command analysis process (step S4300). Details of the received command analysis processing will be described later. After the received command analysis process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a process during variation effect (step S4305). The process during the change effect is a process for setting a pre-change end command at a specific timing during the change effect and causing the display screen 7a to execute the specific display effect, and details thereof will be described later. After the variation effect processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs switch processing (step S4310). In the switch processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the display content of the display screen 7a based on switch data (edge data and level data) output based on the detection signal from the effect button detection switch 63a. . After the switch process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a command transmission process (step S4315). In the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 receives various commands set in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub RAM 94 by the received command analysis process or the like, the image control board 100, the sound control board 106, and the lamp control board 107. To the relay board 108. The image control board 100 that has received the various commands uses the image display device 7 to execute a display effect according to the received command. In addition, the voice control board 106 that has received the various commands executes voice effects in which voice is output from the speaker 67 in accordance with the received commands. The lamp control board 107 that has received the various commands executes a lamp effect that performs light emission control of the panel lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 in accordance with the received commands. After the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processes (step S4320) and ends the process. In other processing, for example, random number update processing or the like is performed.

[Received command analysis processing]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the received command analysis process (FIG. 36: step S4300). The effect control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not a prior determination command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4415). If it has been received (step S4415: YES), prefetch effect determination processing is performed (step S4420). The “prefetching effect determination process” is a process of determining whether or not to execute a prefetching effect and a prefetching effect pattern in the case of executing the prefetching effect. Details of the pre-reading effect determination process will be described later. On the other hand, if not received (step S4415: NO), the above-described prefetch effect determination process is skipped. The pre-reading effect is an effect that suggests that there is a high possibility that jackpot is included in the hold information newly stored in the special figure hold storage area 85, and is executed during the change effect.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a reserved ball number command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4445). If received (step S4445: YES), hold display processing is performed (step S4450). In the hold display process, the counter set area 94d of the sub RAM 94 is provided based on the information on the special figure 1 hold ball number, the special figure 2 hold ball number, and the normal symbol hold ball number included in the hold ball number command. The values of the first special figure hold effect counter, the second special figure hold effect counter, and the general figure hold effect counter are updated. Thereby, not only the main control board 80 side but also the sub control board 90 side can hold the information of the number of each retained ball. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 is based on the values of the first special figure hold effect counter, the second special figure hold effect counter, and the ordinary figure hold effect counter, and the hold image 9A displayed on the display screen 7a, Update 9B. On the other hand, when the pending ball number command has not been received (step S4445: NO), the above-described pending display process is skipped.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a variation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4455). If it has been received (step S4455: YES), a variation effect start process is performed (step S4460). “Variation effect start processing” is processing for selecting a variation effect pattern (contents) to be executed during the special symbol change. Details of the variation production start process will be described later. On the other hand, if not received (step S4455: NO), the above-described variation effect start process is skipped.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a variation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4465). If it is received (step S4465: YES), a variation effect end process is performed (step S4470). The “variation effect end process” is a process for stopping the variation effect executed during the special symbol change. In the variation effect end process, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a counter and the like based on the analysis result of the variation stop command, and sets a variation effect end command for ending the variation effect. As a result, the decorative symbol corresponding to the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 being changed is stopped and displayed. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a prior determination information shift process (FIG. 39), which will be described later. If the change stop command has not been received (step S4465: NO), the above-described change effect end process is skipped.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an opening command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4475). If received (step S4475: YES), an opening effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4480). The “opening effect pattern determination process” is a process of selecting an opening effect pattern (contents) to be executed at the start of a special game (big hit game). In the opening effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the opening command, and sets the information related to the special figure stop symbol data set at the time of the jackpot winning determination included in the opening command in the sub RAM 94. Then, an effect pattern of the opening effect set in advance corresponding to the hit type indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and an opening effect start command for starting the selected opening effect is displayed in the effect command set area of the sub RAM 94 Set to 94b. When the opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 displays a predetermined opening effect image in the ROM 103. Are displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. In step S4475, when the opening command is not received (step S4475: NO), the above-described opening effect pattern determination process is skipped.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a round designation command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4485). If it is received (step S4485: YES), round effect pattern determination processing is performed (step S4490). The “round effect pattern determination process” is a process of selecting an open game effect pattern (contents) to be executed during the opening of the big prize opening or during the interval between releases in the special game (big hit game). In the round effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the round designation command, and sets information related to the special figure stop symbol data and information related to the number of rounds included in the round designation command in the sub RAM 94. To do. Then, an effect pattern of a preset round effect corresponding to the hit type and the number of rounds indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and a round effect start command for starting the selected round effect is displayed in the effect of the sub RAM 94. Set in the command set area 94b. When the round effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined round effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. In step S4485, when the round designation command is not received (step S4485: NO), the round effect pattern determination process described above is skipped.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an ending command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4495). If it is received (step S4495: YES), an ending effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4500). “Ending effect pattern determination process” is a process of selecting an ending effect pattern (contents) to be executed during the ending of a special game (big hit game or small hit game). In the ending effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the ending command and sets information related to the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command in the sub RAM 94. Then, an ending effect pattern corresponding to the hit type indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and an ending effect start command for starting the selected ending effect is set in the output buffer of the sub RAM 94. When the ending effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined ending effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. If the ending command has not been received (step S4495: NO), the above-described ending effect pattern determination process is skipped.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4545). In other processing, for example, when the production control microcomputer 91 receives the gaming state designation command, the information related to the gaming state included in the gaming state designation command (whether the state is a high probability state, whether the state is a short time state, the probability change) Counter, hourly counter value, etc.) are held in the sub-RAM 94. In addition, when the V control command is received, the effect control microcomputer 91 causes the sub RAM 94 to hold the information that has passed V. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a process based on a command other than the above (customer standby command, RAM clear notification command, etc.), and ends this process.

[Pre-reading effect determination process]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the prefetch effect determination process (FIG. 37: step S4420). The effect control microcomputer 91 first performs a prior determination information rewriting process (step S4601). Specifically, the production control microcomputer 91 includes a jackpot advance determination result (big hit determination information), a jackpot type advance determination result (big hit type information), and a variation included in the prior determination command received from the main control board 80. The pattern preliminary determination result (variation pattern information) is stored in the preliminary determination information storage area 94c.

  FIG. 39 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of the advance determination information storage area 94c. In addition to the jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, and variation pattern information described above, pre-reading effect pattern information is stored in the prior determination information storage area 94c. The prefetch effect pattern information is information indicating the content of the prefetch effect executed during the variation effect, and is selected in step S4604 described later. In FIG. 39A, the jackpot determination information “losing” and the variation pattern information “P72” and “P73” are the first to third as the prior determination results respectively corresponding to the first to third items on the special figure 2 hold. A state is shown in which a pre-determination result corresponding to the change is stored in the storage area and stored in the area. FIG. 39B shows a special figure 2 winning from the state shown in FIG. 39A. The pre-judgment information included in the pre-judgment command received from the main control board 80 is shown in the fourth figure in FIG. The state stored in the corresponding fourth storage area is shown. Here, the jackpot determination information “big hit”, the jackpot type information “21H”, and the variation pattern information “P61” are stored as the prior determination information. In addition, in addition to the first to fourth storage areas corresponding to the first to fourth reserved special figure 2 and the area corresponding to the change, “pattern A” is used as pre-reading effect pattern information. "Is set. FIG. 39C shows a state in which the change has been completed from the state of FIG. 39B and the prior determination information shift process has been executed. Specifically, the advance determination information stored in the first storage area is shifted to the area, and the advance determination information stored in the second to fourth storage areas is shifted to the first to third storage areas. The preliminary determination information in the four storage areas is cleared. The prior determination information shift process is executed in the variation effect end process (FIG. 37: step S4470).

  Returning to FIG. 38, subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the pre-read effect pattern information is stored in the prior determination information storage area 94 c (step S 4602). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the pre-read effect pattern information is stored in any of the area of the prior determination information storage area 94c and the first to fourth storage areas. If pre-reading effect pattern information is stored (step S4602: YES), this process ends. That is, when pre-reading effect pattern information is stored in either the relevant area of the prior determination information storage area 94c or the first to fourth storage areas, new pre-reading effect pattern information is not selected and stored. On the other hand, when the pre-reading effect pattern information is not stored in the advance determination information storage area 94c (step S4602: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 indicates that the advance determination result included in the received advance determination command is “big hit”. Alternatively, it is determined whether or not “Leach with reach” has occurred (step S4603). Whether it is “big hit” or “losing with reach” can be determined, for example, based on a variation pattern prior determination result (variation pattern information). When the prior determination result included in the received prior determination command is “no reach loss” (step S4603: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 ends this process. This is because there is no need to perform pre-reading production. On the other hand, when the pre-determination result included in the received pre-determination command is “big hit” or “losing with reach” (step S4603: YES), pre-reading effect execution determination for determining whether to execute the pre-reading effect, And prefetch effect pattern selection is performed (step S4604). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the value of the prefetch effect random number counter, and refers to the acquired random number value and the prefetch effect pattern determination table T51 stored in the sub ROM 93 to perform the prefetch effect. Whether or not to perform the pre-reading effect pattern in the case of performing the pre-reading effect is determined.

  FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining the prefetch effect pattern determination table T51. In FIG. 40, when the pre-judgment result is “big hit” and the prefetch effect random value is “0 to 55”, the prefetch effect is “none”, and when the prefetch effect random number is “56 to 67”, the prefetch effect is When “pattern A” is selected and the prefetch effect random number is “68 to 127”, “pattern B” is selected as the prefetch effect. Further, when the pre-determined result is “Leach with reach” and the prefetch effect random value is “0 to 107”, the prefetch effect is “None”, and when the prefetch effect random value is “108 to 114”, the prefetch effect is When “pattern A” is selected and the pre-reading effect random value is “115 to 127”, “pattern B” is selected as the pre-reading effect. Note that the type and content of the prefetch effect pattern and the range of the selected random value can be arbitrarily set.

  Returning to FIG. 38, when it is determined in step S4604 that the prefetch effect is to be executed (step S4605: YES), the selected prefetch effect pattern is stored in the prior determination information storage area 94c (step S4606). Here, when the pre-reading effect pattern is stored in the prior determination information storage area 94c, not only the storage area corresponding to the received prior determination command among the first to fourth storage areas but also the storage prior to the corresponding storage area. The prefetch effect pattern is also stored in the area and the area. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39 (B), not only “pattern A” is set in the fourth storage area corresponding to the received prior determination command, but also the first to third storage areas and the area. Also set “Pattern A”. As a result, the prefetch effect pattern A is also executed in the variation effect (variation effect corresponding to the region and the first to third storage areas) executed before the change effect corresponding to the fourth storage area is executed. . Whether or not the pre-reading effect is executed with the variation effect corresponding to the region depends on the progress of the variation effect. That is, in the variation effect, the prefetch effect is not executed if the timing for executing the prefetch effect has already passed, but if it is before the timing for executing the prefetch effect, it is executed at that timing. This will be described later. If it is determined in step S4604 that the pre-reading effect is not executed (step S4605: NO), the process ends.

[Variation production start processing]
FIG. 41 is a flowchart of the variable effect start process (FIG. 37: step S4460). The production control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the change start command (step S5000). Here, the production control microcomputer 91 sets information related to the special figure stop symbol data included in the change start command and information related to the change pattern in the sub RAM 94. The set information includes game state information indicating the current game state, symbol information indicating a symbol as a determination result of the hit determination process of special figure 1 or special figure 2, and the like. The game state information and symbol information acquired here can be referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91 as appropriate.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a basic effect pattern determination process (step S5010). The basic effect pattern determination process is a basic structure of a variable effect (for example, display and switching of a background image on the image display device 7, display and operation of a predetermined character, output of a melody or sound effect using the speaker 67). , Lamp lighting control, etc.). The variation effect is completed by superimposing additional effects such as a chance-up effect and a prefetch effect on the basic effect. The effect control microcomputer 91 refers to the basic effect pattern determination table T52 stored in the sub ROM 93 to determine the basic effect pattern.

  FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining the basic effect pattern determination table T52. In FIG. 42, a plurality of types of basic effect patterns for performing normal reach effects, a plurality of types of basic effect patterns for performing SP1 effects, a plurality of types of basic effect patterns for performing SP2 effects, and a plurality of types of basic effect patterns for performing SP3 effects, A plurality of types of basic production patterns for performing reach-less loss production are set. The kind of basic production pattern can be set arbitrarily. Here, for example, when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is “P1”, the basic effect pattern for performing the SP1 effect is selected. Further, when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is “P72”, the basic effect pattern that performs the reach-less loss effect is selected.

  Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the basic effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a chance-up effect pattern determination process (step S5015). The chance-up effect pattern determination process is a process for determining an additional effect to be superimposed on the variable effect. The effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the value of the chance-up random number counter, and determines the chance-up effect pattern by referring to the acquired random number value and the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 stored in the sub ROM 93.

  FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53. Here, only a portion of the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 that determines the variable effect pattern of the special figure 1 in the non-time-short state is shown. That is, FIG. 43 shows a chance-up effect pattern that is executed when the variation patterns included in the variation start command are “P1” to “P16”. The chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 includes a part for determining a chance-up effect pattern to be executed when the variation pattern is “P21” to “P33”, “P41” to “P56”, “61” to “73”. It may or may not be provided.

  In FIG. 43, “2-NO” “2-SP1” “2-SP2” “2-SP3” “3-NO” “3-SP1” “3-SP2” “3-SP3” “ “4-NO”, “4-SP1”, “4-SP2”, “4-SP3”, and “ANO” are set. These chance effect patterns correspond to various chance up effects described later.

  Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the chance-up effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 further refers to the random value and the stop symbol pattern determination table T54 to combine the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R to be stopped and displayed. May be determined. Thus, it is determined what kind of effect is to be performed as the variable effect.

  The effect control microcomputer 91 sets a change effect start command in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub RAM 94 so that a change effect based on the change effect pattern determined in steps S5010 to S5015 is realized. Step S5020). When the change effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 displays the change effect image. The data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a variable effect timer (step S5030), and ends this process. In the variation effect timer, a variation time (FIG. 42) corresponding to the variation pattern variation pattern included in the variation start command is set. For example, when the variation pattern is “P1”, “40 seconds” is set in the variation effect timer.

[Processing during fluctuation production]
FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the fluctuating effect process (FIG. 36: step S4305). The effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the change effect is being performed (step S4701). Whether or not the changing effect is being performed can be determined, for example, based on whether or not the changing effect timer is zero. If the variation effect is not being performed (step SS4701: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, when the changing effect is being performed (step SS4701: YES), the effect controlling microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it is time to set the pre-change end command in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4702). The pre-change end command is a command for the effect control microcomputer 91 to notify the image control board 100 or the like that it is a specific timing during the change effect, and the image control board 100 receives the pre-change end command. In accordance with the information included in the pre-change end command, the effect content is switched, a specific image is displayed, and the like.

  If it is not the time to set the command before the end of change (step S4702: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is time to set the command before the end of change (step S4702: YES), it is determined whether or not there is pre-reading effect pattern information in the area of the prior determination information storage area 94c (step S4703). If there is pre-read effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: YES), the pre-change end command including the pre-read effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4704). On the other hand, when there is no prefetch effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: NO), the pre-change end command not including the prefetch effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4705). Thereby, when there is pre-reading effect pattern information in the area, a command before end of change including pre-reading effect pattern information is transmitted to the image control board 100 2 seconds before the end of the change effect. Then, the image control microcomputer 101 starts a prefetch effect for displaying a prefetch effect image on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. On the other hand, even when there is no pre-reading effect pattern information in the area, the pre-change end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 2 seconds before the end of the change. Here, when the preview image is already displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the image control microcomputer 101 starts the preview fade effect for fading the preview image.

8). Operation of Image Control Microcomputer 101 The operation of the image control microcomputer 101 provided on the image control board 100 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIG. A buffer or the like which appears in the operation description of the image control microcomputer 101 is provided in the RAM 104. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the display control process. When the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the image control microcomputer 101 reads the program from the ROM 103, and after the CPU initialization process, the display control process is repeatedly executed. In the display control process, first, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a change effect start command is received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5001). If the image is received (step S5001: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts the change effect display (step S5002). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the received variation effect start command, reads a predetermined variation effect image instructed in the variation effect start command from the ROM 103, and displays it on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. Display. On the other hand, if not received (step S5001: NO), the above process is skipped.

  Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a pre-change end command has been received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5003). If it is received (step 5003: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts pre-reading effect display (step S5004). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the pre-change end command, and if the pre-change end command includes pre-read effect pattern information, reads a predetermined pre-read effect image from the ROM 103, and displays the image display device. 7 on the display screen 7a. Even if the pre-change end command does not include the pre-reading effect pattern information, if the preview image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the notification fade effect for fading the preview image is performed. Do it. On the other hand, if not received (step S5003: NO), the above process is skipped.

  Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a variation effect end command is received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5005). When the image is received (step 5005: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 reads the image with the variable effect stopped and displayed from the ROM 103, and performs the variable effect stop display to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. (Step S5006). On the other hand, if not received (step S5005: NO), the above process is skipped.

  Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 performs other processing (step S4545). In other processing, for example, when receiving the opening effect start command, the image control microcomputer 101 reads a predetermined opening effect image instructed in the opening effect start command from the ROM 103, and displays the display screen of the image display device 7. 7a is displayed. When a round effect start command is received, a predetermined round effect image instructed by the round effect start command is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a. When a ending effect start command is received, a predetermined ending effect image instructed by the ending effect start command is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a, and this process is terminated.

9. Operation of Image Display Device 7 FIGS. 46 to 48 are diagrams for explaining the operation of the image display device 7. The effect control microcomputer 91 movably controls the image display device 7 (the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B) during a game effect (display effect) or an initial operation when the power is turned on. As shown in FIG. 46, the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B can move vertically or horizontally, or rotate. In addition, as shown in FIG. 47, the first image display device 7A may be arranged so as to cover the second image display device 7B by moving downward from above. Further, as shown in FIG. 1 or FIG. 48, the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B are arranged adjacent to each other, and use two display areas of the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. A display effect is executed.

10. Operation of the movable accessory (panel movable body 15) FIG. 49 or FIG. 50 is a diagram for explaining the operation of the movable accessory (panel movable body 15). The effect control microcomputer 91 movably controls the board movable body 15 during a game effect (display effect) or an initial operation when the power is turned on. The board movable body 15 includes two movable combinations, that is, an upper movable combination and an entire movable combination. Further, the upper movable combination includes a left movable combination and a right movable combination. The state in which the board movable body 15 exists in the position shown in FIG. 49, the state shown in FIG. 49 is the unfolded position of the upper movable accessory. At this time, the upper movable accessory is developed in front of the image display device 7 (first mode). In other words, both the left movable accessory and the right movable accessory have advanced in front of the image display device 7. In the movable board 15, the state shown in FIG. 50 is the developed position of the entire movable accessory (second mode). When either the upper movable accessory or the entire movable accessory of the board movable body 15 is deployed to the deployed position, the player can recognize that the accessory has been completed. The effect control microcomputer 91 can move the panel movable body 15 from the home position to the deployed position. The board movable body 15 is basically at the position of the home position, and is appropriately moved to the development position by the effect control microcomputer 91 according to the display effect (game effect). The movable panel 15 is arranged on the front surface of the display screen 7a and / or the display screen 7b (the front side of the display screen 7a or / and the display screen 7b) of the image display device 7 when it is controlled to move to the unfolded position. In other words, it is arranged at a position overlapping with a predetermined area of the display screen 7a or the display screen 7b when viewed from the player. Accordingly, in this case, the board movable body 15 is in a state of blocking a predetermined area of the display screen 7a or the display screen 7b as viewed from the player. In addition, when the board movable body 15 exists in a home position, it will be in the position which does not overlap with the display screen 7a or the display screen 7b.

11. Examples of Effects, Examples of Effects, Modifications, and Aspects of Embodiments Hereinafter, examples of effects (examples of display effects and examples of movable object effects) of the present embodiment will be described. In addition, an effect example, a modified example, and an example of the effect example will be described together. As described above, the effects to be described are based on various information (such as jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, variation pattern information, prior determination information, etc.) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81, as described above. This is an effect realized by the image control microcomputer 101). The following display effect examples are executed by the image display device 7 (the first image display device 7A and / or the second image display device 7B). Specifically, the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B are in a predetermined positional relationship (for example, adjacent to each other, separated from each other, one on the other upper side, one on the left side of the other, partly overlapped, one This is an example of a display effect when is moving and both are moving. In addition, the hold display (hold icon) may be omitted in the display effect example.

  Hereinafter, the display effects A to F before and after the movement will be described with reference to FIGS. This before-and-moving display effect can be executed during a decorative symbol variation effect or a reach effect (super reach effect). That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the change effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the display effect before and after the movement, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen. This is a display effect displayed on 7a and 7b.

[Pre- and post-movement display effect A]
FIG. 51 is a diagram for explaining the display effect A before and after movement. In the display effect A before and after movement, first, the first effect shown in FIG. The first effect is that both the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B display screens with the first image display device 7A positioned on the left side and the second image display device 7B positioned on the right side. A star-shaped image S1 is displayed using 7a and 7b. Specifically, the left image IM11 displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A and the right image IM12 displayed on the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B are visually connected. And a star-shaped image S1 is formed as a whole. That is, the image S1 is displayed across the display screens 7a and 7b.

  Next, the display device movement effect shown in FIG. 51 (B) is executed. Specifically, with the left image IM11 displayed on the display screen 7a and the right image IM12 displayed on the display screen 7b, the first image display device 7A is in the right direction and the second image display device 7B is in the left direction. Move to. Accordingly, the first image display device 7A passes through the front of the second image display device 7B and moves to the right side of the second image display device 7B. When the first image display device 7A is positioned in front of the second image display device 7B, the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B overlap each other, so that the display screen of the second image display device 7B 7b becomes difficult to see from the player.

  Next, the second effect shown in FIG. 51 (C) is executed. In the second effect, with the movement of the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B, the first image display device 7A is positioned on the right side and the second image display device 7B is positioned on the left side. An image S2 representing a smile is displayed using the display screens 7a and 7b of both the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B. Specifically, the right image IM21 displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A and the left image IM22 displayed on the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B are visually connected. And an image S2 representing a smile as a whole is configured.

[Display effect B before and after movement]
FIG. 52 is a diagram for explaining the before and after display effect B. The pre-movement display effect B is different from the pre-movement display effect A in FIG. 51 in the relative positional relationship between the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B. 52A, in the state where the first image display device 7A is positioned on the upper side and the second image display device 7B is positioned on the lower side, the first image display device 7A and the second image display device. A star-shaped image S1 is displayed using both display screens 7a and 7b of 7B. Specifically, the upper image IM11 displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A is visually connected to the lower image IM12 displayed on the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B. Thus, a star-shaped image S1 is formed as a whole. That is, the image S1 is displayed across the display screens 7a and 7b.

  Next, the display device movement effect shown in FIG. 52 (B) is executed. Specifically, in a state where the upper image IM11 is displayed on the display screen 7a and the lower image IM12 is displayed on the display screen 7b, the first image display device 7A is directed downward and the second image display device 7B is moved upward. Move in the direction. Thus, the first image display device 7A passes through the front of the second image display device 7B and moves to the lower side of the second image display device 7B. When the first image display device 7A is positioned in front of the second image display device 7B, the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B overlap each other, so that the display screen of the second image display device 7B 7b becomes difficult to see from the player.

  Next, the second effect shown in FIG. 52 (C) is executed. In the second effect, the first image display device 7A is positioned on the lower side and the second image display device 7B is positioned on the upper side by the movement of the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B. The image S2 representing a smile is displayed using the display screens 7a and 7b of both the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B. Specifically, the lower image IM21 displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A and the upper image IM22 displayed on the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B are visually connected. Thus, an image S2 representing the smile as a whole is configured.

[Display effect C before and after movement]
FIG. 53 is a diagram for explaining the display effect C before and after the movement. The pre-movement display effect C differs from the pre-movement display effect A in FIG. 51 in that only the first image display device 7A moves. 53A, in the state where the first image display device 7A overlaps a part of the second image display device 7B, the first image display device 7A is on the left side and the second image display device 7B is on the left side. Located on the right side. In this state, the star-shaped image S1 is displayed using the display screens 7a and 7b of both the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B. Specifically, the upper image IM11 displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A is visually connected to the lower image IM12 displayed on the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B. Thus, a star-shaped image S1 is formed as a whole. That is, the image S1 is displayed across the display screens 7a and 7b.

  Next, the display device movement effect shown in FIG. 53 (B) is executed. Specifically, the left image IM11 is displayed on the display screen 7a, the right image IM12 is displayed on the display screen 7b, and the first image display device 7A is in the right direction while the second image display device 7B is stationary. Move to. Accordingly, the first image display device 7A passes through the front of the second image display device 7B and moves to the right side of the second image display device 7B. When the first image display device 7A is positioned in front of the second image display device 7B, the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B overlap each other, so that the display screen of the second image display device 7B 7b becomes difficult to see from the player.

  Next, the second effect shown in FIG. 53 (C) is executed. In the second effect, the first image display device 7A is positioned on the right side, the second image display device 7B is positioned on the left side, and the first image display device 7A overlaps a part of the second image display device 7B. An image S2 representing a smile is displayed using the display screens 7a and 7b of both the one image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B. Specifically, the right image IM21 displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A and the left image IM22 displayed on the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B are visually connected. And an image S2 representing a smile as a whole is configured.

[Display effect D before and after movement]
FIG. 54 is a view for explaining the display effect D before and after movement. Compared with the before-and-after display effect A in FIG. 51, the first and second image display devices 7A and 7B are separated from each other in the first and second effects. Is different. 54A, in the state where the first image display device 7A is positioned on the upper side and the second image display device 7B is positioned on the lower side, the first image display device 7A and the second image display device. A star-shaped image S1 is displayed using both display screens 7a and 7b of 7B. Specifically, the upper image IM11 displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A is visually connected to the lower image IM12 displayed on the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B. Thus, a star-shaped image S1 is formed as a whole. At this time, the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b are physically and visually separated from each other, but the upper image IM11 and the lower image IM12 are in a shape corresponding to each other, so that they are generally visually connected. Looks like. That is, even in this case, the image S1 is displayed so as to straddle the display screens 7a and 7b.

  Next, the display device movement effect shown in FIG. 54 (B) is executed. Specifically, in a state where the upper image IM11 is displayed on the display screen 7a and the lower image IM12 is displayed on the display screen 7b, the first image display device 7A is directed downward and the second image display device 7B is moved upward. Move in the direction. Thus, the first image display device 7A passes through the front of the second image display device 7B and moves to the lower side of the second image display device 7B. When the first image display device 7A is positioned in front of the second image display device 7B, the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B overlap each other, so that the display screen of the second image display device 7B 7b becomes difficult to see from the player.

  Next, the second effect shown in FIG. 54 (C) is executed. In the second effect, the first image display device 7A is positioned on the lower side and the second image display device 7B is positioned on the upper side by the movement of the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B. The image S2 representing a smile is displayed using the display screens 7a and 7b of both the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B. Specifically, the lower image IM21 displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A and the upper image IM22 displayed on the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B are visually connected. Thus, an image S2 representing the smile as a whole is configured. At this time, the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b are physically and visually separated from each other. However, since the shapes of the lower image IM21 and the upper image IM22 are shapes corresponding to each other, they are generally visually connected. Looks like.

[Pre- and post-movement display effect E]
FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining the pre- and post-movement display effects E. The pre-movement display effect E differs from the pre-movement display effect A in FIG. 51 in the contents of the images displayed during the first effect and the second effect. In the first effect of FIG. 55 (A), the first image display device 7A and the second image display device with the first image display device 7A positioned on the upper side and the second image display device 7B positioned on the lower side. The light emission image S1 is displayed using both the display screens 7a and 7b of 7B. Specifically, the upper image IM11 displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A is visually connected to the lower image IM12 displayed on the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B. Thus, a light emission image S1 that represents the streak of light as a whole is configured. That is, the light emission image S1 is displayed across the display screens 7a and 7b.

  Next, the display device movement effect shown in FIG. 55 (B) is executed. Specifically, in a state where the upper image IM11 is displayed on the display screen 7a and the lower image IM12 is displayed on the display screen 7b, the first image display device 7A is directed downward and the second image display device 7B is moved upward. Move in the direction. Thus, the first image display device 7A passes through the front of the second image display device 7B and moves to the lower side of the second image display device 7B. When the first image display device 7A is positioned in front of the second image display device 7B, the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B overlap each other, so that the display screen of the second image display device 7B 7b becomes difficult to see from the player.

  Next, the second effect shown in FIG. 55 (C) is executed. In the second effect, the first image display device 7A is positioned on the lower side and the second image display device 7B is positioned on the upper side by the movement of the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B. The luminescent image S2 is displayed using the display screens 7a and 7b of both the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B. Specifically, the lower image IM21 displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A and the upper image IM22 displayed on the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B are visually connected. Thus, a luminescent image S2 that represents the streak of light as a whole is configured. The luminescent image S2 may have the same shape, pattern, and color as the luminescent image S1, or may be at least partially different.

[Pre- and post-movement display effect F]
FIG. 56 is a diagram for explaining the display effect F before and after movement. The before and after display movement effect F is compared with the before and after movement display effect A in FIG. 51, and the contents of the images displayed at the time of the first effect and the second effect and the movable accessory in front of the image display device. The point where is located is different. Here, it is assumed that the panel movable accessory 15 (upper movable accessory) is stationary at the advanced position (deployment position). 56A, the first image display device 7A is located on the upper side, the second image display device 7B is located on the lower side, and in front of a part of the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A. The board movable accessory 15 is located. In this state, the light emission image S1 is displayed using the display screens 7a and 7b of both the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B. Specifically, the upper image IM11 displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A is visually connected to the lower image IM12 displayed on the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B. Thus, a light emission image S1 that represents the streak of light as a whole is configured. That is, the light emission image S1 is displayed across the display screens 7a and 7b. A part of the luminescent image S1 is in a state that is difficult to visually recognize by the movable board accessory 15.

  Next, the display device movement effect shown in FIG. 56 (B) is executed. Specifically, in a state where the upper image IM11 is displayed on the display screen 7a and the lower image IM12 is displayed on the display screen 7b, the first image display device 7A is directed downward and the second image display device 7B is moved upward. Move in the direction. Thus, the first image display device 7A passes through the front of the second image display device 7B and moves to the lower side of the second image display device 7B. When the first image display device 7A is positioned in front of the second image display device 7B, the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B overlap each other, so that the display screen of the second image display device 7B 7b becomes difficult to see from the player.

  Next, the second effect shown in FIG. 56 (C) is executed. In the second effect, the first image display device 7A is positioned on the lower side and the second image display device 7B is positioned on the upper side by moving the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B. The movable board accessory 15 is located in front of a part of the display screen 7b of the display device 7B. In this state, the luminescent image S2 is displayed using the display screens 7a and 7b of both the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B. Specifically, the lower image IM21 displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A and the upper image IM22 displayed on the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B are visually connected. Thus, a luminescent image S2 that represents the streak of light as a whole is configured. A part of the luminescent image S2 may be in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize the movable board accessory 15. The luminescent image S2 may have the same shape, pattern, and color as the luminescent image S1, or may be at least partially different.

[Example of effects]
Below, the example of the effect of the display effect before and after a movement is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 51 to 56, the first image display device 7A is in the first direction side (FIG. 51: left side, FIG. 52: upper side, second image display device 7B). 53: left side, FIG. 54: upper side, FIG. 55: upper side, and FIG. 56: upper side), the first effect using both the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B. After the first presentation, the first image display device 7A moves, and the first image display device 7A is in the second direction side (the opposite direction side to the first direction) than the second image display device 7B. The second effect can be performed using both the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 51 to 56, in the first effect, the image IM11 displayed on the first image display device 7A and the image displayed on the second image display device 7B. The IM 12 is displayed so as to be visually connected. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 51 to 52 and FIGS. 54 to 56, the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B are both configured to be movable. After the presentation, both the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B are moved, and the first image display device 7A is located on the second direction side with respect to the second image display device 7B. The second production will be performed. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 51 to 56, after the first effect, the first image display device 7A moves while displaying the image IM11 displayed in the first effect. To start. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 52 and 54 to 56, in the first effect, the first image display device 7A is located above the second image display device 7B, In the second effect, the first image display device 7A is located below the second image display device 7B. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 51 to 56, after the first effect, the first image display device 7A passes in front of the second image display device 7B, and the first image display device. When 7A is located in front of the second image display device 7B, the second image display device 7B is in a state of being difficult to visually recognize. According to this configuration, the player can be entertained visually. Can be improved.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, when the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B are executing the first effect, at least the first image display device 7A. A panel movable accessory 15 located at a part of the front is provided. According to this structure, according to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of the display effect before and after a movement is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the first effect, the image IM11 displayed on the display screen 7a and the image IM12 displayed on the display screen 7b are displayed so as to be visually connected. did. However, in the first effect, the image IM11 and the image IM12 do not have to be visually connected as long as they are images that are related to each other. For example, the image IM11 and the image IM12 may be graphics having the same shape or images that move in the same manner. Further, the image IM11 and the image IM12 may be displayed alternately. The same applies to the second effect.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first image display device 7A is always configured to be movable. However, only the second image display device 7B may be configured to be movable. Even in this case, the second effect can be executed by moving the second image display device 7B after the first effect.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first image display device 7A is configured to be able to pass in front of the second image display device 7B. However, the first image display device 7A may be configured to be able to pass through the rear (back side) of the second image display device 7B.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the display device movement effect, the display screen 7a is displayed with the image IM11, and the display screen 7b is displayed with the image IM12. However, at least one of the image IM11 and the image IM12 may not be displayed (disappear) during the display device movement effect.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A1-1]
First display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
A second display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images, and a gaming machine comprising:
The first display means is configured to be movable,
With the first display means positioned closer to the first direction than the second display means, the first display means and the second display means are used to display the first display means. 1 production,
After the first effect, the first display means moves, and the first display device is positioned closer to the second direction than the second display device. Performing a second effect using both the display means and the display means of the second display means;
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A1-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect A1-1,
In the first effect, the image displayed on the first display means and the image displayed on the second display means are displayed so as to be visually connected.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A1-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect A1-1 or aspect A1-2,
The second display means is configured to be movable,
After the first effect, both the first display means and the second display means move, and the first display device is located on the second direction side with respect to the second display device. Perform the second performance while
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A1-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A1-1 to A1-3,
After the first effect, the first display means starts moving while displaying the image displayed in the first effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A1-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A1-1 to A1-4,
In the first effect, the first display means is located above the second display means,
In the second effect, the first display means is located below the second display means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A1-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-1 to A1-5,
After the first effect, the first display means passes in front of the second display means, and when the first display means is located in front of the second display means, The second display means is in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize;
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A1-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-1 to A1-6,
When the first display means and the second display means are performing the first effect, the first display means and the second display means are provided with an accessory positioned in front of at least a part of the first display means,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  The image movement display effects A to F will be described below with reference to FIGS. This image movement display effect can be executed during the decorative effect change effect or the reach effect (super reach effect). That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the change effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the image movement display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen. This is a display effect displayed on 7a and 7b.

[Image move display effect A]
FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining the image movement display effect A. In the image movement display effect A, first, the image / display device movement effect of FIG. 57 (A) is executed. In this image / display device movement effect, in a state where the first image display device 7A overlaps a part of the front surface of the second image display device 7B, the first image display device 7A is on the left side and the second image display device 7B is on the right side. Is located. A star-shaped image IM1 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A, and the image IM1 moves to the left in the display screen 7a. In this state, the first image display device 7A moves to the right and the second image display device 7B moves to the left.

  Next, the image straddling effect shown in FIG. 57 (B) is executed. Specifically, due to the rightward movement of the first image display device 7A and the leftward movement of the second image display device 7B, the first image display device 7A still overlaps a part of the front surface of the second image display device 7B. In the state, the first image display device 7A is located on the right side and the second image display device 7B is located on the left side. At this time, the image IM1 moving leftward in the display screen 7a is located at the left end of the display screen 7a, and the star-shaped left side is out of frame. On the other hand, on the display screen 7b, an image IM2 having a shape corresponding to the frame-out portion is displayed at a corresponding position, and a star image is formed by the images IM1 and IM2. The star image formed by the images IM1 and IM2 is displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, and moves to the left as a whole. It should be noted that the image IM2 only needs to have a shape corresponding to the image IM1 that is visible to the player, and the portion (hidden portion) that is difficult to visually recognize by the first image display device 7A has an arbitrary shape. The figure may be Or nothing may be displayed. For example, the image IM2 may have the same star shape as the image IM1 as a whole by combining the visible portion and the difficult-to-view portion, or may include only the portion corresponding to the visible image IM1. Good.

  Next, the image movement completion effect shown in FIG. 57 (C) is executed. Specifically, the entire image IM1 is framed out from the display screen 7a due to the leftward movement of the star image displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, and the image on the display screen 7b is displayed. IM2 becomes visible as the shape of the entire star. That is, the movement of the star image from the display screen 7a to the display screen 7b is completed. The image IM2 moves leftward within the display screen 7b and out of the frame from the left end of the display screen 7b.

[Image move display effect B]
FIG. 58 is a diagram for explaining the image movement display effect B. The image movement display effect B differs from the image movement display effect A in FIG. 57 in the relative positional relationship between the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B. In the image / display device movement effect of FIG. 58 (A), in a state where the first image display device 7A overlaps a part of the front surface of the second image display device 7B, the first image display device 7A is the upper side, and the second image is displayed. The display device 7B is located on the lower side. A star-shaped image IM1 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A, and the image IM1 moves upward in the display screen 7a. In this state, the first image display device 7A moves downward, and the second image display device 7B moves upward.

  Next, the image straddling effect shown in FIG. 58 (B) is executed. Specifically, due to the downward movement of the first image display device 7A and the upward movement of the second image display device 7B, the first image display device 7A still overlaps a part of the front surface of the second image display device 7B. In the state, the first image display device 7A is positioned on the lower side, and the second image display device 7B is positioned on the upper side. At this time, the image IM1 moving upward in the display screen 7a is positioned at the upper end of the display screen 7a, and the upper side of the star shape is out of the frame. On the other hand, on the display screen 7b, an image IM2 having a shape corresponding to the frame-out portion is displayed at a corresponding position, and a star image is formed by the images IM1 and IM2. The star image formed by the images IM1 and IM2 is displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, and moves upward as a whole. It should be noted that the image IM2 only needs to have a shape corresponding to the image IM1 that is visible to the player, and the portion (hidden portion) that is difficult to visually recognize by the first image display device 7A has an arbitrary shape. The figure may be Or nothing may be displayed.

  Next, the image movement completion effect shown in FIG. 58 (C) is executed. Specifically, the upward movement of the star image displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b causes the entire image IM1 to be framed out from the display screen 7a, and the image on the display screen 7b. IM2 becomes visible as the shape of the entire star. That is, the movement of the star image from the display screen 7a to the display screen 7b is completed. The image IM2 moves upward in the display screen 7b and out of the frame from the upper end of the display screen 7b.

[Image move display effect C]
FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining the image movement display effect C. In the image movement display effect C, the relative positional relationship between the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B and the image in the second image display device 7B are compared with the image movement display effect A in FIG. Is different from the first to the first image display device 7A. 59A, the first image display device 7A is positioned on the lower side, the second image display device 7B is positioned on the upper side, the first image display device 7A is positioned upward, and the second image is displayed. The display device 7B moves downward. In this state, a star-shaped image IM2 is displayed on the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B, and the image IM2 moves upward in the display screen 7b. The moving speed of the image IM2 in the upward direction is slower than the relative speed of the first image display device 7A with respect to the second image display device 7B.

  Next, the image straddling effect shown in FIG. 59 (B) is executed. Specifically, due to the upward movement of the first image display device 7A and the downward movement of the second image display device 7B, the first image display device 7A still overlaps a part of the front surface of the second image display device 7B. It becomes a state. At this time, the image IM2 moving upward in the display screen 7b is covered by the upper end of the first image display device 7A in order from the lower end side. On the display screen 7a, an image IM1 having a shape corresponding to a portion covered by the upper end of the first image display device 7A is displayed. Thereby, a star-shaped image is formed by the images IM1 and IM2. The star image formed by the images IM1 and IM2 is displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, and moves upward as a whole. The image IM2 only needs to form a star shape with the image IM1 in a portion that can be visually recognized by the player, and a portion that is difficult to visually recognize by the first image display device 7A (a hidden portion) The figure may be an arbitrary shape. Or nothing may be displayed.

  Next, the image movement completion effect shown in FIG. 59 (C) is executed. Specifically, the image IM2 on the display screen 7b is entirely covered with the first image display device 7A by the upward movement of the first image display device 7A and the downward movement of the second image display device 7B, and the display screen 7a. The image IM1 is visible as the shape of the entire star. That is, the movement of the star image from the display screen 7b to the display screen 7a is completed. The image IM1 moves upward in the display screen 7a and out of the frame from the upper end of the display screen 7a.

[Image move display effect D]
FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining the image movement display effect D. FIG. The image movement display effect D is preliminarily applied to the relative positional relationship between the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B and the second image display device 7B as compared with the image movement display effect A in FIG. The difference is that the image IM2 is displayed. In the image / display device movement effect of FIG. 60 (A), in a state where the first image display device 7A overlaps a part of the front surface of the second image display device 7B, the first image display device 7A is on the upper side, and the second image is displayed. The display device 7B is located on the lower side. A star-shaped image IM1 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A, and the image IM1 moves upward in the display screen 7a. In addition, a star-shaped image IM2 is displayed on the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B, and the image IM2 moves upward in the display screen 7b. In this state, the first image display device 7A moves downward, and the second image display device 7B moves upward.

  Next, the image straddling effect shown in FIG. 60 (B) is executed. Specifically, due to the downward movement of the first image display device 7A and the upward movement of the second image display device 7B, the first image display device 7A still overlaps a part of the front surface of the second image display device 7B. In the state, the first image display device 7A is positioned on the lower side, and the second image display device 7B is positioned on the upper side. At this time, the image IM1 moving upward in the display screen 7a is positioned at the upper end of the display screen 7a, and the upper side of the star shape is out of the frame. On the other hand, the upper end of the image IM2 is displayed on the display screen 7b at a position corresponding to the frame-out portion of the image IM1, and a star image is formed by the images IM1 and IM2. The star image formed by the images IM1 and IM2 is displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, and moves upward as a whole.

  Next, the image movement completion effect shown in FIG. Specifically, the upward movement of the star image displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b causes the entire image IM1 to be framed out from the display screen 7a, and the image on the display screen 7b. The entire IM2 becomes visible. That is, an effect is produced in which one star image appears to have moved from the display screen 7a to the display screen 7b. The image IM2 moves upward in the display screen 7b and out of the frame from the upper end of the display screen 7b.

[Image move display effect E]
FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining the image movement display effect E. FIG. The image movement display effect E moves across the two display screens and the relative positional relationship between the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B, as compared with the image movement display effect A of FIG. The number of images is different. In the image / display device movement effect in FIG. 61A, in a state where the first image display device 7A overlaps a part of the front surface of the second image display device 7B, the first image display device 7A is the upper side, and the second image is displayed. The display device 7B is located on the lower side. A star-shaped first image IM11, second image IM12, and third image IM13 are displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A, and the three images IM11, IM12, and IM13 are displayed in the display screen 7a. Each is moving upward. In this state, the first image display device 7A moves downward, and the second image display device 7B moves upward.

  Next, the image straddling effect shown in FIG. 61 (B) is executed. Specifically, due to the downward movement of the first image display device 7A and the upward movement of the second image display device 7B, the first image display device 7A still overlaps a part of the front surface of the second image display device 7B. In the state, the first image display device 7A is positioned on the lower side, and the second image display device 7B is positioned on the upper side. At this time, two images IM11 and IM12 out of the three images IM11, IM12, and IM13 moving upward in the display screen 7a are framed out at the upper end of the display screen 7a. On the other hand, on the display screen 7b, images IM21 and IM22 having a shape corresponding to the frame-out portion are displayed at positions corresponding to each other, and one star image is formed by the images IM11 and IM21. Another star image is formed by IM22. The star image formed by the image IM11 and the image IM21 and the star image formed by the image IM12 and the image IM22 are displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, respectively. Move to. Note that the image IM21 and the image IM22 only have to have shapes that can be visually recognized by the player corresponding to the images IM11 and IM12, and portions that are difficult to visually recognize by the first image display device 7A (hidden portions). ) May be a figure of any shape. Or nothing may be displayed. The image IM13 is the same as the images IM11 and IM12.

  Next, the image movement completion effect shown in FIG. 61 (C) is executed. Specifically, the entire images IM11, IM12, and IM13 are framed out from the display screen 7a due to the upward movement of the three star images displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. The images IM21, IM22 and IM23 on the display screen 7b can be visualized as the shape of the entire star. That is, the movement of the three star images from the display screen 7a to the display screen 7b is completed. The three star images IM21, IM22, IM23 move upward in the display screen 7b and out of the frame from the upper end of the display screen 7b.

[Image move display effect F]
FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining the image movement display effect F. FIG. The image movement display effect F moves across the two display screens and the relative positional relationship between the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B as compared with the image movement display effect A in FIG. The difference is in the number of images and the point that the movable accessory is located in front of the image display device. Here, it is assumed that the panel movable accessory 15 (upper movable accessory) is stationary at the advanced position (deployment position). In the image / display device movement effect of FIG. 62 (A), in a state where the first image display device 7A overlaps a part of the front surface of the second image display device 7B, the first image display device 7A is the upper side, and the second image is displayed. The display device 7B is located on the lower side. The movable board accessory 15 is located in front of a part of the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A. A star-shaped first image IM11, second image IM12, and third image IM13 are displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A, and the three images IM11, IM12, and IM13 are displayed in the display screen 7a. Each is moving upward. The second image IM12 and the third image IM13 are partly in a state that is difficult to visually recognize by the movable board accessory 15. The third image IM13 shows a state in which the right side of the star shape is out of the frame from the right end of the display screen 7a. In this state, the first image display device 7A moves downward, and the second image display device 7B moves upward.

  Next, the image straddling effect shown in FIG. 62 (B) is executed. Specifically, due to the downward movement of the first image display device 7A and the upward movement of the second image display device 7B, the first image display device 7A still overlaps a part of the front surface of the second image display device 7B. In the state, the first image display device 7A is positioned on the lower side, and the second image display device 7B is positioned on the upper side. At this time, the three images IM11, IM12, and IM13 moving upward in the display screen 7a are framed out at the upper end of the display screen 7a. On the other hand, on the display screen 7b, images IM21, IM22, and IM23 having shapes corresponding to the frame-out portion are displayed at corresponding positions, and a first star image is formed by the images IM11 and IM21. A second star image is formed by IM12 and image IM22, and a third star image is formed by image IM13 and image IM23. The first to third star images are displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, respectively, and move upward as a whole. Note that the image IM21, the image IM22, and the image IM23 only need to have shapes corresponding to the image IM11, the image IM12, and the IM13, and are difficult to be visually recognized by the first image display device 7A. The (hidden part) may be a figure of any shape. Or nothing may be displayed. The images IM22 and IM23 are partly in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize the movable board accessory 15.

  Next, the image movement completion effect shown in FIG. 62 (C) is executed. Specifically, the three images IM11, IM12, and IM13 are entirely framed from the display screen 7a due to the upward movement of the three star images displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. The three images IM21, IM22, IM23 on the display screen 7b become visible as the shape of the entire star. That is, the movement of the three star-shaped images from the display screen 7a to the display screen 7b is completed. The three star images IM21, IM22, IM23 move upward in the display screen 7b and out of the frame from the upper end of the display screen 7b.

  The operation unit image contact effects A to E will be described below with reference to FIGS. The operation unit image contact effect can be executed during a decorative symbol variation effect or a reach effect (super reach effect). That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the operation unit image contact effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed. This is a display effect displayed on the screens 7a and 7b.

[Operation unit image contact effect A]
FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining the operation unit image contact effect A. In the operation unit image contact effect A, first, the operation unit image display effect of FIG. 63 (A) is executed. In this effect, the button image BN is displayed on the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B with the first image display device 7A positioned on the left side and the second image display device 7B positioned on the right side. The button image BN represents the appearance of the effect button 63.

  Next, the display device movement effect shown in FIG. 63 (B) is executed. Specifically, the first image display device 7A moves to the right while the second image display device 7B on which the button image BN is displayed on the display screen 7b is stationary. Accordingly, the first image display device 7A is positioned in front of the second image display device 7B, and a part of the front surface of the display screen 7b is covered with the first image display device 7A.

  Next, the operation unit image contact effect shown in FIG. 63 (C) is executed. In this effect, a part of the button image BN displayed on the display screen 7b becomes difficult to be visually recognized by the first image display device 7A due to the rightward movement of the first image display device 7A. Thereafter, the first image display device 7A overlaps with the second image display device 7B, and the display screen 7b is in a state that is difficult for the player to visually recognize.

[Operation unit image contact effect B]
FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining the operation unit image contact effect B. The operation unit image contact effect B is different from the operation unit image contact effect A in FIG. 63 in the relative positional relationship between the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B. 64A is displayed on the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B with the first image display device 7A positioned on the upper side and the second image display device 7B positioned on the lower side. A button image BN is displayed. The button image BN represents the appearance of the effect button 63.

  Next, the display device movement effect shown in FIG. 64 (B) is executed. Specifically, the first image display device 7A moves downward while the second image display device 7B on which the button image BN is displayed on the display screen 7b is stationary. Accordingly, the first image display device 7A is positioned in front of the second image display device 7B, and a part of the front surface of the display screen 7b is covered with the first image display device 7A.

  Next, the operation unit image contact effect shown in FIG. 64 (C) is executed. In this effect, a part of the button image BN displayed on the display screen 7b becomes difficult to be visually recognized by the first image display device 7A due to the downward movement of the first image display device 7A. Thereafter, the first image display device 7A overlaps with the second image display device 7B, and the display screen 7b is in a state that is difficult for the player to visually recognize.

[Operation unit image contact effect C]
FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining the operation unit image contact effect C. FIG. The operation unit image contact effect C is compared with the operation unit image contact effect A of FIG. 63 in the relative positional relationship between the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B and the operation unit image contact effect. The contents are different. 65A is displayed on the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B with the first image display device 7A positioned on the upper side and the second image display device 7B positioned on the lower side. A button image BN is displayed. The button image BN represents the appearance of the effect button 63.

  Next, the display device movement effect shown in FIG. 65 (B) is executed. Specifically, the first image display device 7A moves downward while the second image display device 7B on which the button image BN is displayed on the display screen 7b is stationary. Accordingly, the first image display device 7A is positioned in front of the second image display device 7B, and a part of the front surface of the display screen 7b is covered with the first image display device 7A.

  Next, the operation unit image contact effect shown in FIG. 65 (C) is executed. In this effect, a part of the button image BN displayed on the display screen 7b becomes difficult to be visually recognized by the first image display device 7A due to the downward movement of the first image display device 7A. At this time, the mode of the button image BN changes. Specifically, the button image BN has a large shape, and the color changes to another color. In addition, the change of an aspect is not limited above, For example, it may blink, an image becomes thin, it changes to things other than a button, may rotate, or may move. Thereafter, the first image display device 7A overlaps with the second image display device 7B, and the display screen 7b is in a state that is difficult for the player to visually recognize.

[Operation unit image contact effect D]
FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining the operation unit image contact effect D. FIG. The operation unit image contact effect D is compared with the operation unit image contact effect A shown in FIG. The content of the contact effect is different. 66A, the first image display device 7A is positioned on the upper side, the second image display device 7B is positioned on the lower side, and the first image display device 7A is one of the second image display devices 7B. It is located in front of the part. A button image BN is displayed on the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B. The button image BN represents the appearance of the effect button 63.

  Next, the display device movement effect shown in FIG. 66 (B) is executed. Specifically, the first image display device 7A moves downward while the second image display device 7B on which the button image BN is displayed on the display screen 7b is stationary. Immediately before the first image display device 7A touches or touches the button image BN, the button image BN changes to an image as if the button exploded.

  Next, the operation unit image contact effect shown in FIG. 66 (C) is executed. In this effect, the downward movement of the first image display device 7A makes it difficult for the first image display device 7A to visually recognize part of the button image BN in an exploded state. Thereafter, the first image display device 7A overlaps with the second image display device 7B, and the display screen 7b is in a state that is difficult for the player to visually recognize.

[Operation unit image contact effect E]
FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining the operation unit image contact effect E. FIG. The operation unit image contact effect E is compared with the operation unit image contact effect A of FIG. 63, the relative positional relationship between the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B, the display device movement effect, the operation unit image The content of the contact effect and the point that the movable accessory is located in front of the image display device are different. Here, it is assumed that the panel movable accessory 15 (upper movable accessory) is stationary at the advanced position (deployment position). 67A, the first image display device 7A is positioned on the upper side, the second image display device 7B is positioned on the lower side, and the first image display device 7A is one of the second image display devices 7B. It is located in front of the part. The movable board accessory 15 is located in front of a part of the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A. A button image BN is displayed on the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B. The button image BN represents the appearance of the effect button 63. Further, on the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, light emission images S1 and S2 representing light streaks are displayed, respectively. The light emission image S1 and the light emission image S2 are images corresponding to each other. Here, the light emission image S1 and the light emission image S2 are displayed so as to be visually connected. A part of the luminescent image S <b> 1 is difficult to visually recognize by the movable board accessory 15.

  Next, the display device movement effect shown in FIG. 67 (B) is executed. Specifically, the first image display device 7A moves downward while the second image display device 7B on which the button image BN is displayed on the display screen 7b is stationary. Immediately before the first image display device 7A touches or touches the button image BN, the button image BN changes to an image as if the button exploded. On the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, light emission images S1 and S2 representing light streaks are displayed, respectively. A part of the luminescent image S <b> 1 is difficult to visually recognize by the movable board accessory 15.

  Next, the operation unit image contact effect shown in FIG. 67 (C) is executed. In this effect, the downward movement of the first image display device 7A makes it difficult for the first image display device 7A to visually recognize a part of the button image BN that has exploded. On the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, light emission images S1 and S2 representing light streaks are displayed, respectively. Thereafter, the first image display device 7A overlaps with the second image display device 7B, and the display screen 7b is in a state that is difficult for the player to visually recognize.

[Example of effects]
Below, the effect example of an operation part image contact effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 63 to 67, the first image display device 7A is in the second image display device 7B while the button image BN is displayed on the second image display device 7B. The first image display device 7A produces an effect that makes at least a part of the button image BN difficult to view. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 64 to 67, the first image display device 7A is movable in the vertical direction, and in the display device movement effect, the first image display device 7A is the second image display device 7A. By moving downward from a position above the image display device 7B, at least a part of the button image BN is made difficult to view. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 65 to 67, the state of the button image BN changes before and after part of the button image BN becomes difficult to be visually recognized by the first image display device 7A. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 67, when the button image BN is displayed on the second image display device 7B, both the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B are used. The light emission images S1 and S2 corresponding to each other are displayed. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Effect 5]
As shown in FIG. 67, the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment includes a movable board accessory 15 positioned in front of at least a part of the first image display device 7A. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of an operation part image contact effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
The first image display device 7A may cover only a part or all of the button image BN displayed on the display screen 7b. Further, the first image display device 7A may be stopped after being partially covered, or may be returned to the direction in which it comes. Further, after the tongue image BN is partially covered by the first image display device 7A, the entire image may disappear or may change to another shape.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, an example of an effect using the button image BN as an example of the operation unit image is shown, but an operation unit image other than the button image may be used. For example, an operation unit image representing the appearance of a lever, a handle, or the like may be used.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first image display device 7A has been described as an example of a moving effect. However, the second image display device 7B on which the button image BN is displayed may move, and the first image display device 7A may not move. Even in this case, since a part of the button image BN displayed on the second image display device 7B is covered with the first image display device 7A, the same effect can be performed.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A2-1]
Operation means that can be operated by the player;
Movable first display means;
A second display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images, and a gaming machine comprising:
One of the plurality of types of images is an operation unit image representing an appearance of the operation means,
In a state where the operation unit image is displayed on the second display unit, the first display unit moves to the front of the second display unit, and at least the operation unit image is displayed by the first display unit. Produce a part that is difficult to see,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A2-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect A2-1,
The first display means is movable up and down;
In the production, the first display unit moves downward from a position higher than the second display unit, thereby making at least a part of the operation unit image difficult to view.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A2-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect A2-1 or aspect A2-2,
In the production, the aspect of the operation unit image changes before and after a part of the operation unit image becomes difficult to be visually recognized by the first display unit.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A2-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A2-1 to A2-3,
In the effect, when the operation unit image is displayed on the second display unit, images corresponding to each other are displayed on both the first display unit and the second display unit.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A2-1 to A2-4,
When the effect is being executed, the game includes an accessory located in front of at least a part of the first display means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  The image movement hold change effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. This image movement hold change effect can be executed during decoration effect change effect or reach effect (super reach effect). That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the change effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the image movement hold change effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed. This is a display effect displayed on the screens 7a and 7b.

[Image move hold change effect A]
FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining the image movement hold change effect A. FIG. In the image movement hold change effect A, first, the image appearance effect of FIG. 68 (A) is executed. In the image appearance effect, the first image display device 7A is positioned on the upper side, the second image display device 7B is positioned on the lower side, and the reserved images 9A and 9B and the reserved digested image 9C are displayed below the second image display device 7B. Yes. In this state, the image IM1 appears from the upper right of the display screen 7a. The image IM1 is an image corresponding to a part of a specific target (here, a star-shaped figure). That is, the image IM1 is displayed in a shape in which the upper right side of the star-shaped figure is out of frame, and gradually moves to the lower left. A specific object means anything that can be recognized as an independent object, and includes images such as characters and objects, as well as abstract figures, characters, symbols, smoke, lines, afterimages, etc. included.

  Next, the image movement effect shown in FIG. 68 (B) is executed. Specifically, the image IM1 that appears from the upper right of the display screen 7a moves in the lower left direction, and is displayed as a whole to form a star shape (star image), which contacts the lower end of the display screen 7a. Then, the image straddling effect shown in FIG. 68 (C) is executed. Specifically, at the lower end of the display screen 7a, the image IM1 has a shape in which the lower side of a specific target (star-shaped figure) is framed out. On the other hand, an image IM2 having a shape corresponding to the frame-out portion is displayed on the display screen 7b, and an image (here, a star image) representing a specific target is formed by the images IM1 and IM2. The star image formed by the images IM1 and IM2 is displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, and moves as a whole in the lower left direction.

  Next, the hold change effect shown in FIG. 68 (D) is executed. Specifically, after the star image is displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, one of the four reserved images 9A (the reserved image IM3) corresponds to the star image. To change. That is, at least one of the shape, color, operation, and the like of the reserved image IM3 changes to one that corresponds to the shape, color, operation, etc. of the star image. Here, the shape of the reserved image IM3 changes to a star shape.

[Image move hold change effect B]
FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining the image movement hold change effect B. FIG. The image movement hold change effect B is different from the image move hold change effect A in FIG. 68 in the relative positional relationship between the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B. In the image appearance effect of FIG. 69 (A), the first image display device 7A is located on the right side, the second image display device 7B is located on the left side, and the reserved image 9A and the reserved digested image 9C are located below the second image display device 7B. It is displayed. In this state, the image IM1 appears from the upper right of the display screen 7a. The image IM1 is an image corresponding to a part of a specific target (here, a star-shaped figure). That is, the image IM1 is displayed in a shape in which the upper right side of the star-shaped figure is out of frame, and gradually moves to the lower left. A specific object means anything that can be recognized as an independent object, and includes images such as characters and objects, as well as abstract figures, characters, symbols, smoke, lines, afterimages, etc. included.

  Next, the image movement effect shown in FIG. 69 (B) is executed. Specifically, the image IM1 that appears from the upper right of the display screen 7a moves in the lower left direction, and is displayed as a whole to form a star-shaped figure, and touches the left end of the display screen 7a. Then, the image straddling effect shown in FIG. 69 (C) is executed. Specifically, at the right end of the display screen 7a, the image IM1 has a shape in which the left side of a specific target (star-shaped figure) is out of frame. On the other hand, an image IM2 having a shape corresponding to the frame-out portion is displayed on the display screen 7b, and an image (here, a star image) representing a specific target is formed by the images IM1 and IM2. The star image formed by the images IM1 and IM2 is displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, and moves as a whole in the lower left direction.

  Next, the hold change effect shown in FIG. 69 (D) is executed. Specifically, after the star image is displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, one of the four reserved images 9A (the reserved image IM3) corresponds to the star image. To change. That is, at least one of the shape, color, operation, and the like of the reserved image IM3 changes to one that corresponds to the shape, color, operation, etc. of the star image. Here, the shape of the reserved image IM3 changes to a star shape.

[Image move hold change effect C]
FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining the image movement hold change effect C. FIG. 68. Compared with the image movement hold change effect A in FIG. 68, the image move hold change effect C is a point that the decorative design is displayed on the first image display device 7A and a movable accessory in front of the first image display device 7A. The point where is located is different. Here, it is assumed that the panel movable accessory 15 (upper movable accessory) is stationary at the advanced position (deployment position). In the image appearance effect shown in FIG. 70A, the first image display device 7A is positioned on the upper side, the second image display device 7B is positioned on the lower side, and a board is displayed in front of a part of the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A. A movable accessory 15 is located. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed below the first image display device 7A, and the reserved images 9A and 9B and the reserved digested image 9C are displayed below the second image display device 7B. In this state, the image IM1 appears from the upper right of the display screen 7a. The image IM1 is an image corresponding to a part of a specific target (here, a star-shaped figure). That is, the image IM1 is displayed in a shape in which the upper right side of the star-shaped figure is out of frame, and gradually moves to the lower left. A specific object means anything that can be recognized as an independent object, and includes images such as characters and objects, as well as abstract figures, characters, symbols, smoke, lines, afterimages, etc. included. A part of the image IM1 becomes difficult to visually recognize by the movable board accessory 15.

  Next, the image straddling effect shown in FIG. 70 (B) is executed. Specifically, the image IM1 that appears from the upper right of the display screen 7a moves in the lower left direction and contacts the left end of the display screen 7a. At the lower end of the display screen 7a, the image IM1 has a shape in which the lower side of the specific target (star-shaped figure) is framed out. On the other hand, an image IM2 having a shape corresponding to the frame-out portion is displayed on the display screen 7b, and an image (here, a star image) representing a specific target is formed by the images IM1 and IM2. At this time, the star-shaped image is out of the frame at the upper end and the right end of the display screen 7a. Further, the movable board accessory 15 is located in front of a part of the star-shaped image, and a part of the star-shaped image is in a state that is difficult to visually recognize by the movable board accessory 15. The star-shaped image formed by the images IM1 and IM2 is displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, and further moves in the lower left direction as shown in FIG. 70C.

  Next, the hold change effect shown in FIG. 70 (D) is executed. Specifically, after a star image is displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, one of the reserved images 9A (the reserved image IM3) changes to a mode corresponding to the star image. To do. That is, at least one of the shape, color, operation, and the like of the reserved image IM3 changes to one that corresponds to the shape, color, operation, etc. of the star image. Here, one shape of the reserved image IM3 changes to a star shape.

[Image move hold change effect D]
FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining the image movement hold change effect D. FIG. The image movement hold change effect D is different from the image move hold change effect A in FIG. 68 in that the size of a specific target (here, a star-shaped figure) represented by the image IM1 and the image IM2 changes. Is different. A specific object means anything that can be recognized as an independent object, and includes images such as characters and objects, as well as abstract figures, characters, symbols, smoke, lines, afterimages, etc. included.

  In the image appearance effect shown in FIG. 71A, the first image display device 7A is positioned on the upper side, and the second image display device 7B is positioned on the lower side. Below the second image display device 7B, reserved images 9A and 9B and a reserved digested image 9C are displayed. In this state, the image IM1 appears from the upper right of the display screen 7a. The image IM1 is an image corresponding to a part of a specific target (here, a star-shaped figure). That is, the image IM1 is displayed in a shape in which the upper right side of the star-shaped figure is out of frame, and gradually moves to the lower left.

  Next, the image straddling effect shown in FIG. 71 (B) is executed. Specifically, the image IM1 (star-shaped figure) that appears from the upper right of the display screen 7a becomes larger while moving in the lower left direction, and contacts the left end of the display screen 7a. At the lower end of the display screen 7a, the image IM1 has a shape in which the lower side of the star-shaped figure is framed out. On the other hand, an image IM2 having a shape corresponding to the frame-out portion is displayed on the display screen 7b, and an image (here, a star image) representing a specific target is formed by the images IM1 and IM2. At this time, the star-shaped image is out of the frame at the upper end and the right end of the display screen 7a. The star-shaped image formed by the images IM1 and IM2 is displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, and moves in the lower left direction while becoming larger as shown in FIG. 71 (C). .

  Next, the hold change effect shown in FIG. 71 (D) is executed. Specifically, after a star image is displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, one of the reserved images 9A (the reserved image IM3) changes to a mode corresponding to the star image. To do. That is, at least one of the shape, color, operation, and the like of the reserved image IM3 changes to one that corresponds to the shape, color, operation, etc. of the star image. Here, the shape of the reserved image IM3 changes to a star shape.

[Example of effects]
Hereinafter, an example of the effect of the image movement hold change effect will be shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 68 to 71, a first effect in which a star-shaped graphic image (specific image) is displayed on the first image display device 7A, and a first effect. After that, after the second effect in which a star-shaped graphic image is displayed across both the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B, and after the second effect, the second image display device 7B A third effect in which the displayed held image IM3 changes can be executed. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 68 to 71, in the first effect, a specific image corresponding to a part of a specific target (here, a star-shaped figure) is displayed. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 68 to 71, in the third effect, the reserved image IM3 changes to a shape corresponding to the specific image (here, a star image). According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 71, the specific image (here, a star image) displayed in the second effect is larger than the specific image displayed in the first effect. Is big. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 70, in the first effect, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the first image display device 7A. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Effect 6]
As shown in FIG. 70, the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment includes the movable board accessory 15 positioned in front of at least a part of a specific image (here, a star-shaped image) in the second effect. . According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of an image movement suspension change effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the number of reserved images that change to the mode corresponding to the specific image is one, but the number of reserved images that change to the corresponding mode may be plural. In addition, the reserved image that changes to the corresponding mode may change other than the shape. For example, the color may change to the same color as the specific image, or the same operation as the specific image may be performed.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the reserved image is changed to a mode corresponding to the specific image after the specific image is displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. However, the hold image may change to a mode corresponding to the specific image before the specific image crosses the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, or may change simultaneously with the crossing.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the movable board accessory 15 is positioned in front of a part of the star-shaped image, and a part of the star-shaped image is difficult to be visually recognized by the movable board accessory 15. Yes. However, the movable board accessory 15 may be located in front of the entire star-shaped image, and the entire movable star-shaped image 15 may be difficult to visually recognize.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
◇ [Aspect B1-1]
First display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
A second display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images, and a gaming machine comprising:
After the first effect that the specific image is displayed on the first display means and the first effect, the specific image spans both the first display means and the second display means. A second effect to be displayed, and a third effect in which the hold icon displayed on the second display means is changed after the second effect,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B1-2]
A gaming machine according to B1-1,
The specific image is an image representing a specific target,
In the first effect, an image corresponding to a part of the specific target is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B1-3]
A gaming machine according to B1-1 or B1-2,
In the third effect, the hold icon changes to a shape corresponding to the specific image.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B1-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of B1-1 to B1-3,
The specific image displayed in the second effect is larger in size than the specific image displayed in the first effect,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B1-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of B1-1 to B1-4,
In the first effect, a decorative design is displayed on the first display means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of B1-1 to B1-5,
An accessory located in front of at least a part of the specific image displayed in the second effect is provided.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  The operation corresponding operation display effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. This operation corresponding action display effect can be executed during a decorative symbol variation effect or a reach effect (super reach effect). That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the change effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the operation corresponding operation display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed. This is a display effect displayed on the screens 7a and 7b.

[Operation-related action display effect A]
FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining the operation corresponding operation display effect A. In the operation corresponding operation display effect A, first, the vertical vibration effect of FIG. 72 (A) is executed. In the vertical vibration effect, the first image display device 7A is positioned on the upper side and the second image display device 7B is positioned on the lower side. The first image display device 7A displays a specific image IM1 representing a specific target (here, a star-shaped figure) and a meter image IM2 representing a meter in which a plurality of rectangular figures are arranged. On the second image display device 7B, an operation unit image (button image) BN representing the appearance of the effect button 63 and an operation method suggestion image RD that suggests an operation method of the effect button 63 are displayed. Here, the operation method suggestion image RD is configured as a character image of “continuous hitting !!”. Note that the operation method suggestion image RD may be any character, figure, symbol, or the like as long as it is an image that suggests the operation method of the operation means (the effect button 63 in this case).

  In this state, the specific image IM1 on the display screen 7a moves in a direction corresponding to the operation direction of the effect button 63. Specifically, the specific image IM1 vibrates in the vertical direction. This vertical direction corresponds to the operation direction of the effect button 63. The meter image IM2 changes according to the operation of the effect button 63 by the player. Here, the color of the rectangular figure constituting the meter changes in order from the lower rectangular figure according to the amount of operation of the effect button 63 by the player. The button image BN changes color according to the operation of the effect button 63 by the player.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (B), the specific image IM1 moves slowly upward. This upward movement corresponds to the operation direction (vertical direction) of the effect button 63. That is, the specific image IM1 on the display screen 7a continues to move in the direction corresponding to the operation direction of the effect button 63. The color of the rectangular figure composing the meter image IM2 further changes in order from the lower rectangular figure as the amount of operation of the effect button 63 by the player increases. The button image BN changes color according to the operation of the effect button 63 by the player. The display of the operation method suggestion image RD is continued.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 72C, the specific image IM1 slowly moves downward. This downward movement corresponds to the operation direction (vertical direction) of the effect button 63. That is, the specific image IM1 on the display screen 7a continues to move in the direction corresponding to the operation direction of the effect button 63. The color of the rectangular figure composing the meter image IM2 further changes in order from the lower rectangular figure as the amount of operation of the effect button 63 by the player increases. The button image BN changes color according to the operation of the effect button 63 by the player.

  Next, the meter MAX effect shown in FIG. 72 (D) is executed. Specifically, when all the colors of the plurality of rectangular figures constituting the meter image IM2 change, the button image BN changes to an exploded state. The specific image IM1 on the display screen 7a moves in the vertical direction.

[Operation-related action display effect B]
FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining the operation corresponding operation display effect B. The operation corresponding operation display effect B differs from the operation corresponding operation display effect A in FIG. 72 in the type of the operation unit represented by the operation unit image BN and the movement mode of the specific image IM1. 73A, the first image display device 7A is positioned on the upper side, and the second image display device 7B is positioned on the lower side. The first image display device 7A displays a specific image IM1 representing a specific target (here, a star-shaped figure) and a meter image IM2 representing a meter in which a plurality of rectangular figures are arranged. On the second image display device 7B, a handle image HD (operation unit image) representing the appearance of the handle 60 and an operation method suggestion image RD that suggests an operation method of the handle 60 are displayed. Here, the operation method suggestion image RD is configured as a character image of “Turn the handle !!”. The operation method suggestion image RD may be any character, figure, symbol, or the like as long as it is an image that suggests the operation method of the operation means (the handle 60 in this case).

  In this state, the specific image IM1 on the display screen 7a moves in a direction corresponding to the operation direction of the handle 60. Specifically, the specific image IM1 reciprocates in the circumferential direction of the semicircle. This semi-circumferential direction corresponds to the operation direction of the handle 60. The meter image IM2 changes according to the operation of the handle 60 by the player. Here, the color of the rectangular figure constituting the meter changes sequentially from the lower rectangular figure in accordance with the amount of operation of the handle 60 by the player. The color of the handle image HD changes according to the operation of the handle 60 by the player.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 73B and 73C, the specific image IM1 rotates in the left-right direction while moving in the semicircular direction. This left-right rotation also corresponds to the operation direction of the handle 60. In this way, the specific image IM1 on the display screen 7a performs a plurality of operations corresponding to the operation direction of the handle 60. As the amount of operation of the handle 60 by the player increases, the color of the rectangular figure constituting the meter image IM2 further changes sequentially from the lower rectangular figure. The color of the handle image HD changes according to the operation of the handle 60 by the player. The display of the operation method suggestion image RD is continued.

  Next, the meter MAX effect shown in FIG. 73 (D) is executed. Specifically, when all the colors of the plurality of rectangular figures constituting the meter image IM2 change, the handle image HD changes to an exploded state. The specific image IM1 on the display screen 7a moves in the semicircular direction.

[Operation-related action display effect C]
FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining the operation-compatible operation display effect C. The operation corresponding operation display effect C differs from the operation corresponding operation display effect A in FIG. 72 in the type of the operation unit represented by the operation unit image BN and the movement mode of the specific image IM1. Here, it is assumed that the gaming machine 1 is provided with a lever that can be operated by the player. This lever may be installed at any place of the gaming machine 1. In addition, this lever is electrically connected to the sub-control board 90, and the sub-control board 90 can detect the operation of the lever by the player.

  74A, the first image display device 7A is positioned on the upper side, and the second image display device 7B is positioned on the lower side. On the first image display device 7A, a specific image IM1 representing a specific object (here, a sword) and a meter image IM2 representing a meter in which a plurality of rectangular figures are arranged are displayed. The second image display device 7B displays a lever image LV (operation unit image) representing the appearance of the lever and an operation method suggestion image RD that suggests an operation method of the lever. Here, the operation method suggestion image RD is configured as a character image of “pull the lever !!”. Note that the operation method suggestion image RD may be any character, figure, symbol, or the like as long as it is an image that suggests an operation method of the operation means (here, a lever).

  In this state, the specific image IM1 on the display screen 7a moves in a direction corresponding to the operation direction of the lever. Specifically, the specific image IM1 swings left and right. This left / right swing corresponds to the lever operating direction. The meter image IM2 changes according to the lever operation by the player. Here, the color of the rectangular figure constituting the meter changes sequentially from the lower rectangular figure in accordance with the amount of lever operation by the player. The color of the lever image LV changes according to the operation of the lever by the player.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 74 (B) and 74 (C), the specific image IM1 is slowly swung left and right. As shown in FIG. 74B, the specific image IM1 tilting leftward corresponds to the lever operating direction. In addition, as shown in FIG. 74C, the specific image IM1 tilting to the right also corresponds to the operation direction of the lever. Thus, the specific image IM1 on the display screen 7a performs a plurality of operations corresponding to the operation direction of the lever. As the amount of lever operation by the player increases, the color of the rectangular figure constituting the meter image IM2 further changes sequentially from the lower rectangular figure. The shape of the lever image LV changes so as to alternately represent a state where the lever is pulled and a state where the lever is returned to the original state. The display of the operation method suggestion image RD is continued.

  Next, the meter MAX effect shown in FIG. 74 (D) is executed. Specifically, when all the colors of the plurality of rectangular figures constituting the meter image IM2 change, the lever image LV changes to an exploded state. A suggestion image IM3 suggesting the state of the meter is displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, it is configured as a character image of “MAX !!!!”.

[Operation-related action display effect D]
FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining the operation corresponding operation display effect D. The operation corresponding action display effect D is different from the operation corresponding action display effect A of FIG. 72 in that the movable accessory is positioned in front of the first image display device 7A and a character image is included in a part of the operation unit image. The difference is that they overlap. Here, it is assumed that the panel movable accessory 15 (upper movable accessory) is stationary at the advanced position (deployment position).

  75A, the first image display device 7A is positioned on the upper side and the second image display device 7B is positioned on the lower side, and a board is displayed in front of a part of the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A. A movable accessory 15 is located. The first image display device 7A displays a specific image IM1 representing a specific target (here, a star-shaped figure) and a meter image IM2 representing a meter in which a plurality of rectangular figures are arranged. A part of the meter image IM2 becomes difficult to visually recognize by the movable board accessory 15. On the second image display device 7B, an operation unit image (button image) BN representing the appearance of the effect button 63, a character image CA displayed so as to cover a part of the button image BN, and an operation method of the effect button 63 The operation method suggestion image RD that suggests is displayed. Here, the operation method suggestion image RD is configured as a character image of “continuous hitting !!”. Note that the operation method suggestion image RD may be any character, figure, symbol, or the like as long as it is an image that suggests the operation method of the operation means (the effect button 63 in this case).

  In this state, the specific image IM1 on the display screen 7a moves in a direction corresponding to the operation direction of the effect button 63. Specifically, the specific image IM1 vibrates in the vertical direction. This vertical direction corresponds to the operation direction of the effect button 63. The meter image IM2 changes according to the operation of the effect button 63 by the player. Here, the color of the rectangular figure constituting the meter changes in order from the lower rectangular figure according to the amount of operation of the effect button 63 by the player. The button image BN changes color according to the operation of the effect button 63 by the player.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 75B and 75C, the new road in the vertical direction of the specific image IM1 continues. The color of the rectangular figure composing the meter image IM2 further changes in order from the lower rectangular figure as the amount of operation of the effect button 63 by the player increases. The button image BN changes color according to the operation of the effect button 63 by the player. The display of the operation method suggestion image RD is continued.

  Next, the meter MAX effect shown in FIG. 75 (D) is executed. Specifically, when all the colors of the plurality of rectangular figures constituting the meter image IM2 change, the button image BN changes to an exploded state. The specific image IM1 on the display screen 7a moves in the vertical direction.

[Example of effects]
Below, the example of an effect of operation corresponding operation display effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 72 to 75, the operation unit image (for example, the button image BN, the handle image HD, the lever image LV) is displayed on the second image display device 7B. In a state where the specific image IM1 is displayed on the image display device 7A, an operation direction corresponding effect is performed in which the specific image IM1 moves in a direction corresponding to the operation direction of the operation unit. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 72 and 75, the operation unit image represents the appearance of the effect button 63 button, and in the operation direction corresponding effect, the specific image IM1 is the button operation direction. Move up and down. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 72 to 75, the meter image IM2 is displayed on the first image display device 7A, and in the operation direction corresponding effect, the meter is displayed according to the operation of the operation unit by the player. The image IM2 changes. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 72 to 75, in the operation direction corresponding effect, the operation method suggestion image RD is displayed on the second image display device 7B. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 75, in the operation direction corresponding effect, the character image CA is displayed on the first image display device 7A. This character image CA is displayed so as to cover a part of the operation unit image. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 75, when the operation direction corresponding effect is being executed, the movable board accessory 15 is positioned in front of at least a part of the first image display device 7A. Yes. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Modification]
A modification of the operation corresponding action display effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the up / down direction is exemplified as the operation direction of the button image BN, but the left / right direction and the diagonal direction also correspond to the operation direction of the button. The movement corresponding to the operation direction of the operation unit by the specific image may not be repeatedly performed. That is, the movement corresponding to the operation direction may be performed only once.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the meter image is displayed, but the meter image may not be displayed. Also, the operation method suggestion image RD may not be displayed. The character image CA may not be displayed.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the meter image IM2 represents a meter in which a plurality of rectangular figures are arranged. However, the meter image IM2 may have any configuration as long as it can suggest the current situation within a predetermined range.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
◇ [Aspect B2-1]
Operation means that can be operated by the player;
First display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
A second display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images, and a gaming machine comprising:
One of the images displayed on the first display means is a specific image,
One of the images displayed on the second display means is an operation unit image representing the appearance of the operation means,
The operation means can be operated in a specific operation direction,
An operation direction in which the specific image moves in a direction corresponding to the operation direction in a state where the operation unit image is displayed on the second display unit and the specific image is displayed on the first display unit. Perform corresponding production,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B2-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect B2-1,
The operation means is a button,
In the operation direction corresponding effect, the specific image moves up and down.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B2-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect B2-1 or aspect B2-2,
One of the images displayed on the first display means is a meter image,
In the operation direction corresponding effect, the meter image changes according to the operation of the operation means by the player.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B2-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects B2-1 to B2-3,
One of the images displayed on the second display means is an operation method suggestion image that suggests an operation method of the operation means,
In the operation direction corresponding effect, the operation method suggestion image is displayed on the second display means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B2-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects B2-1 to B2-4,
One of the images displayed on the first display means is a character image,
In the operation direction corresponding effect, the character image is displayed so as to cover a part of the operation unit image.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B2-1 to B2-5,
When the operation direction corresponding effect is being executed, it comprises an accessory located in front of at least a part of the first display means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  The image superimposition display effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. This image superimposing display effect can be executed during the decorative effect change effect or the reach effect (super reach effect). That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the change effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the image superimposed display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen. This is a display effect displayed on 7a and 7b.

[Image overlay display effect A]
FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining the image superimposition display effect A. FIG. In the image superimposition display effect A, first, the image appearance effect of FIG. 76 (A) is executed. In the image appearance effect, the first image display device 7A is located on the upper side, and the second image display device 7B is located on the lower side, and each has a corresponding background. Here, both the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b are dark background images. On the second image display device 7B, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, reserved images 9A, 9B, and reserved digested images 9C are displayed. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the reserved images 9A and 9B, and the reserved digested image 9C are displayed darkly together with the background image.

  In this state, a plurality of images IM1 appear from both the left and right sides of each display screen on both the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. The image IM1 has a shape representing a specific target (here, a circular figure). A specific object means anything that can be recognized as an independent object, and includes images such as characters and objects, as well as abstract figures, characters, symbols, smoke, lines, afterimages, etc. included. The image IM1 appears from both the left and right ends of the display screen in a shape in which a part of the circular figure is out of the frame, and moves toward the center of the display screen. In the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, a portion (image region) other than the portion where the image IM1 is displayed is dark.

  Next, the image superimposed display effect shown in FIG. 76 (B) is executed. Specifically, one or more images IM1 of a plurality of images IM1 (circular graphic images) displayed on the display screen 7b are superimposed on a part of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R during movement. That is, the one or more images IM1 are displayed so as to overlap with a part of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and a part of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R becomes difficult to visually recognize with the one or more images IM1. One or more images IM1 move from one display screen of the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b to the other display screen. For example, one or more images IM1 displayed on the display screen 7a move toward the display screen 7b, and at least a part thereof is displayed on the display screen 7b. Thereafter, the entire image IM1 is displayed on the display screen 7b.

  Next, the background image change effect shown in FIG. 76 (C) is executed. Specifically, in the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, an effect of brightening a portion (image region) other than the portion where the image IM1 is displayed is executed. Also at this time, one or more images IM1 of the plurality of images IM1 (circular graphic images) displayed on the display screen 7b are superimposed on a part of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R during movement.

  Next, the accessory appearance effect shown in FIG. 76 (D) is executed. Specifically, the movable board accessory 15 (whole movable actor) moves to the advance position (deployment position) and stops. Thereby, the board movable accessory 15 advances to the front surface of both the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B.

[Image overlay display effect B]
FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining the image overlay display effect B. The image overlay display effect B differs from the image overlay display effect A of FIG. 76 in the relative positional relationship between the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B and the movement mode of the image IM1. In the image appearance effect of FIG. 77 (A), the first image display device 7A is located on the right side and the second image display device 7B is located on the left side, and each has a corresponding background. Here, both the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b are dark background images. On the second image display device 7B, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, a reserved image 9A, and a reserved digested image 9C are displayed. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the reserved image 9A, and the reserved digested image 9C are darkly displayed together with the background image.

  In this state, on both the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, a plurality of images IM1 appear from the upper side of each display screen. The image IM1 has a shape representing a specific target (here, a circular figure). A specific object means anything that can be recognized as an independent object, and includes images such as characters and objects, as well as abstract figures, characters, symbols, smoke, lines, afterimages, etc. included. The image IM1 appears from the upper end of the display screen in a shape in which a part of the circular figure is out of the frame, and moves toward the lower side of the display screen. In the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, a portion (image region) other than the portion where the image IM1 is displayed is dark.

  Next, the image superimposed display effect shown in FIG. 77 (B) is executed. Specifically, one or more images IM1 of a plurality of images IM1 (circular graphic images) displayed on the display screen 7b are superimposed on a part of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R during movement. That is, the one or more images IM1 are displayed so as to overlap with a part of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and a part of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R becomes difficult to visually recognize with the one or more images IM1. One or more images IM1 move from one display screen of the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b to the other display screen. For example, one or more images IM1 displayed on the display screen 7a move toward the display screen 7b, and at least a part thereof is displayed on the display screen 7b. Thereafter, the entire image IM1 is displayed on the display screen 7b.

  Next, the background image change effect shown in FIG. 77 (C) is executed. Specifically, in the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, an effect of brightening a portion (image region) other than the portion where the image IM1 is displayed is executed. Also at this time, one or more images IM1 of the plurality of images IM1 (circular graphic images) displayed on the display screen 7b are superimposed on a part of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R during movement.

  Next, the accessory appearance effect shown in FIG. 77 (D) is executed. Specifically, the movable board accessory 15 (whole movable actor) moves to the advance position (deployment position) and stops. Thereby, the board movable accessory 15 advances to the front surface of both the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B.

[Image overlay display effect C]
FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining the image superimposition display effect C. FIG. The image overlay display effect C is different from the image overlay display effect A of FIG. 76 in that the movable accessory is positioned in front of the image display device during the image appearance effect. Here, it is assumed that the panel movable accessory 15 (upper movable accessory) is stationary at the advanced position (deployment position). In the image appearance effect of FIG. 78 (A), the first image display device 7A is located on the upper side and the second image display device 7B is located on the lower side, and each has a corresponding background. Here, both the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b are dark background images. On the second image display device 7B, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, reserved images 9A, 9B, and reserved digested images 9C are displayed. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the reserved image 9A, and the reserved digested image 9C are darkly displayed together with the background image.

  In this state, a plurality of images IM1 appear from both the left and right sides of each display screen on both the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. The image IM1 has a shape representing a specific target (here, a circular figure). A specific object means anything that can be recognized as an independent object, and includes images such as characters and objects, as well as abstract figures, characters, symbols, smoke, lines, afterimages, etc. included. The image IM1 appears from the left and right ends of the display screen in a shape in which a part of the circular figure is out of the frame, and moves toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen. Part of the image IM1 is difficult to visually recognize due to the movable board 15 (upper movable accessory). In the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, a portion (image region) other than the portion where the image IM1 is displayed is dark.

  Next, the image superimposed display effect shown in FIG. 78 (B) is executed. Specifically, one or more images IM1 of a plurality of images IM1 (circular graphic images) displayed on the display screen 7b are superimposed on a part of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R during movement. That is, the one or more images IM1 are displayed so as to overlap with a part of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and a part of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R becomes difficult to visually recognize with the one or more images IM1. One or more images IM1 move from one display screen of the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b to the other display screen. For example, one or more images IM1 displayed on the display screen 7a move toward the display screen 7b, and at least a part thereof is displayed on the display screen 7b. Thereafter, the entire image IM1 is displayed on the display screen 7b.

  Next, the background image change effect shown in FIG. 78 (C) is executed. Specifically, in the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, an effect of brightening a portion (image region) other than the portion where the image IM1 is displayed is executed. Also at this time, one or more images IM1 of the plurality of images IM1 (circular graphic images) displayed on the display screen 7b are superimposed on a part of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R during movement.

  Next, the accessory appearance effect shown in FIG. 78 (D) is executed. Specifically, the movable board accessory 15 (whole movable actor) moves to the advance position (deployment position) and stops. Thereby, the board movable accessory 15 advances to the front surface of both the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B. At this time, both the upper movable accessory and the entire movable accessory are in the advanced position (deployment position).

[Example of effects]
Below, the example of an effect of an image superimposition display effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 76 to 78, the first image display device 7A and the second image are displayed in the state where the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the second image display device 7B. An image IM1 representing a specific target (here, a circular figure) is displayed on the display device 7B, and the image IM1 provides a first effect that overlaps a part of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 76 to 78, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in the first effect. According to this configuration, since the image IM1 overlaps a part of the decorative symbols whose fluctuation has been stopped, it is possible to visually entertain the player and improve the interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 76 to 78, in the first effect, the background images of the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B change correspondingly. According to this configuration, since the background image changes correspondingly, it is possible to entertain the player visually and improve the interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 76 to 78, in the first effect, the image IM1 displayed on the first image display device 7A moves and at least a part of the image IM1 is the second image. It is displayed on the display device 7B. According to this configuration, since one or more images IM1 are displayed across the two display screens, the player can be entertained visually, and the entertainment can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 78, a movable board accessory 15 (overall movable accessory) that can advance to the front of each of the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B is provided. Then, after the first effect, the movable board accessory 15 performs the second effect that advances to the front of both the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B. According to this configuration, a part of the two display screens is simultaneously covered by a single effect effect, so that the player can be entertained visually and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of an image superimposition display effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the background images of the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b are changed corresponding to the entire display screen. However, the background images of the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b may change correspondingly in part of the display screen.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, one or more images IM1 displayed on the second image display device 7B overlap with a part of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. However, a part of one or more images IM1 displayed on the second image display device 7B may overlap with the entire decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, one or more images IM1 displayed on the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b are moved from one display screen to the other display screen. However, all the images IM1 displayed on the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b may move from one display screen to the other display screen. Further, the image IM1 displayed on the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b may not move from one display screen to the other display screen.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
◇ [Aspect B3-1]
First display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
A second display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images, and a gaming machine comprising:
One of the images displayed on the first display means is a specific image representing a specific target,
One of the images displayed on the second display means is the specific image,
One of the images displayed on the second display means is a decorative design,
In a state where a decorative symbol is displayed on the second display unit, the specific image is displayed on each of the first display unit and the second display unit, and the specific image is at least a part of the decorative symbol. Perform the first production that overlaps,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B3-2]
A gaming machine according to B3-1,
In the first effect, the decorative design is stopped and displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B3-3]
A gaming machine according to B3-1 or B3-2,
In the first effect, at least a part of each of the background images of the first display means and the second display means changes correspondingly.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B3-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of B3-1 to B3-3,
In the first effect, the specific image displayed on the first display means moves and at least a part of the specific image is displayed on the second display means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B3-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of B3-1 to B3-4,
A movable accessory capable of advancing in front of each of the first display means and the second display means;
After the first effect, the movable accessory performs a second effect that advances to the front of both the first display unit and the second display unit.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  The special prefetch effects A to E will be described below with reference to FIGS. This special pre-reading effect is an effect related to a decorative effect variation effect.

[Special look-ahead production A]
FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining the special prefetch effect A.
First, in the special prefetch effect A, as shown in FIG. 79 (A), a change start effect is executed. In this change start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are changing are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the teammate character CRA, the first hold icon 9A, and the second hold icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7b. 79 (B) to (D) below, the display effect related to the prefetch effect is developed. The prefetch target hold of the prefetch effect is the newest hold (hold image 9A) at the time of the change start effect. 3rd hold: see figure).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (B), the first prefetch start effect is executed. In this first prefetch start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped at the prefetch symbol on the display screen 7a, and the first prefetch effect is started. In the first look-ahead start effect, the first hold icon 9A and the second hold icon 9C are continuously displayed on the display screen 7b.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (C), the second prefetch start effect is executed. This second prefetch start effect is an effect in the next change after the change in which the first prefetch start effect in FIG. 79 (B) is performed. In the second prefetch start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped at the prefetch symbol on the display screen 7a, and the first prefetch effect is continuously performed. In the second prefetch start effect, the hold icon corresponding to the prefetch target hold of the first hold icon 9A changes on the display screen 7b, and an image representing the prefetch symbol is displayed in the hold icon. Prefetching production is started. The first prefetching effect and the second prefetching effect are continued until the change corresponding to the prefetching target hold is performed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 79D, a reach effect is executed. This reach effect is an effect that is executed during the change corresponding to the prefetch target hold. In this reach effect, the decorative symbol in the reach state is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the teammate character CRA and the second hold icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7b. The second hold icon 9C includes an image representing a prefetch symbol as a second prefetch effect. This reach effect is an effect performed by the variation that is the target of the first prefetch effect and the second prefetch effect.

[Special look-ahead production B]
FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining the special prefetch effect B.
First, in the special prefetch effect B, as shown in FIG. 80 (A), a change start effect is executed. In this change start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are changing are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the teammate character CRA, the first hold icon 9A, and the second hold icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7b. In addition, in FIGS. 80B to 80D below, display effects related to the pre-reading effects are developed. The pre-reading target hold of the pre-reading effects is the newest hold (holding image 9A) at the time of the change start effect. 3rd hold: see figure).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (B), the first prefetch start effect is executed. In this first prefetch start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped at the prefetch symbol on the display screen 7a, and the first prefetch effect is started. In the first look-ahead start effect, the first hold icon 9A and the second hold icon 9C are continuously displayed on the display screen 7b.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 80C, the second prefetch start effect is executed. This second prefetch start effect is an effect in the next change after the change in which the first prefetch start effect in FIG. In the second prefetch start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped at the prefetch symbol on the display screen 7a, and the first prefetch effect is continuously performed. In the second prefetch start effect, the hold icon corresponding to the prefetch target hold of the first hold icon 9A changes on the display screen 7b, and an image representing the prefetch symbol is displayed in the hold icon. Prefetching production is started.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 80D, the second prefetch end effect is executed. This second look-ahead end effect is an effect in the next change after the change in which the second look-ahead start effect in FIG. In the second prefetch end effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped at the prefetch symbol on the display screen 7a, and the first prefetch effect is continuously performed. In the second pre-reading end effect, the image representing the pre-read symbol in the hold icon corresponding to the pre-read target hold of the first hold icon 9A is erased on the display screen 7b, and the effect of returning to the original hold icon is performed. . That is, in this second prefetch end effect, the second prefetch effect is ended and the first prefetch effect is continued. The first prefetch effect is continued until a change corresponding to the prefetch target suspension is performed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (E), a reach effect is executed. This reach effect is an effect that is executed during the change corresponding to the prefetch target hold. In this reach effect, the decorative symbol in the reach state is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the teammate character CRA and the second hold icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7b. The second hold icon 9C is a normal hold icon without including an image representing a prefetch symbol as the second prefetch effect. This reach effect is an effect performed by the variation that is the target of the first prefetch effect and the second prefetch effect.

[Special look-ahead production C]
FIG. 81 is a diagram for explaining the special prefetch effect C.
First, in the special prefetch effect C, a change start effect is executed as shown in FIG. In this change start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are changing are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the teammate character CRA, the first hold icon 9A, and the second hold icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7b. In addition, in FIGS. 81B to 81D below, display effects related to the pre-reading effect are developed. The pre-reading target hold of the pre-reading effect is the newest hold (holding image 9A) at the time of the change start effect. 3rd hold: see figure).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (B), the first prefetch start effect is executed. In this first prefetch start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped at the prefetch symbol on the display screen 7a, and the first prefetch effect is started. In the first look-ahead start effect, the first hold icon 9A and the second hold icon 9C are continuously displayed on the display screen 7b.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (C), the second prefetch start effect is executed. This second prefetch start effect is an effect in the next change after the change in which the first prefetch start effect in FIG. In the second prefetch start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped at the prefetch symbol on the display screen 7a, and the first prefetch effect is continuously performed. In the second prefetch start effect, the hold icon corresponding to the prefetch target hold of the first hold icon 9A changes on the display screen 7b, and an image representing the prefetch symbol is displayed in the hold icon. Prefetching production is started.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (D), the first prefetch end effect is executed. This first prefetch end effect is an effect in the next change after the change in which the second prefetch start effect in FIG. In the first look-ahead end effect, it is notified on the display screen 7a that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped with normal decorative symbols, and the first look-ahead effect is ended. In the first prefetch end effect, the prefetch symbols in the hold icon corresponding to the prefetch target hold of the first hold icon 9A are continuously displayed on the display screen 7b. That is, in this first prefetching end effect, the first prefetching effect is ended and the second prefetching effect is continued.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (E), a reach effect is executed. This reach effect is an effect that is executed during the change corresponding to the prefetch target hold. In this reach effect, the decorative symbol in the reach state is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the teammate character CRA and the second hold icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7b. The second hold icon 9C includes an image representing a prefetch symbol as a second prefetch effect. This reach effect is an effect performed by the variation that is the target of the first prefetch effect and the second prefetch effect.

[Special look-ahead effect D]
FIG. 82 is a diagram for explaining the special prefetch effect D.
First, in the special prefetch effect D, as shown in FIG. 82 (A), a change start effect is executed. In this change start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are changing are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the teammate character CRA, the first hold icon 9A, and the second hold icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7b. In addition, in FIGS. 82B to 82D below, display effects related to the pre-reading effects are developed. The pre-reading target hold of the pre-reading effects is the newest hold (holding image 9A) at the time of the change start effect. 3rd hold: see figure).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (B), the first prefetch start effect is executed. In this first prefetch start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped at the prefetch symbol on the display screen 7a, and the first prefetch effect is started. In the first look-ahead start effect, the first hold icon 9A and the second hold icon 9C are continuously displayed on the display screen 7b.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 82C, the second prefetch start effect is executed. This second prefetch start effect is an effect in the next change after the change in which the first prefetch start effect in FIG. In the second look-ahead start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R displayed on the display screen 7a in the first look-ahead start effect are moved and displayed on the display screen 7b, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed on the display screen 7b. Is temporarily stopped at the pre-reading design, and the first pre-reading effect is continuously performed. Further, in the second prefetch start effect, the hold icon corresponding to the prefetch target hold of the first hold icon 9A displayed on the display screen 7a in the first prefetch start effect is moved to the display screen 7a and displayed. In 7a, an image representing the prefetched symbol is displayed in the hold icon, and the second prefetching effect is started. The first prefetching effect and the second prefetching effect are continued until the change corresponding to the prefetching target hold is performed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (D), a reach effect is executed. This reach effect is an effect that is executed during the change corresponding to the prefetch target hold. In this reach effect, the decorative symbol in the reach state is displayed on the display screen 7b, and the teammate character CRA and the second hold icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a. The second hold icon 9C includes an image representing a prefetch symbol as a second prefetch effect. This reach effect is an effect performed by the variation that is the target of the first prefetch effect and the second prefetch effect.

[Special lookahead production E]
FIG. 83 is a diagram for explaining the special prefetching effect E.
This special prefetch effect E uses only the display screen 7a without using the display screen 7b.
First, in the special prefetch effect E, as shown in FIG. 83 (A), a change start effect is executed. In the change start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are changing are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the teammate character CRA, the first hold icon 9A, and the second hold icon 9C are displayed. 83 (B) to 83 (D) below, display effects related to the pre-reading effect are developed. The pre-reading target hold of the pre-reading effect is the newest hold (holding image 9A) at the time of the change start effect. 3rd hold: see figure).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (B), the first prefetch start effect is executed. In the first prefetch start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are temporarily stopped at the prefetch symbol on the display screen 7a, the first prefetch effect is started, and the first hold icon 9A and the second hold icon 9C are continued. Is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 83C, the second prefetch start effect is executed. This second prefetch start effect is an effect in the next change after the change in which the first prefetch start effect in FIG. 83 (B) is performed. In the second look-ahead start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped at the look-ahead symbol on the display screen 7a, and the first look-ahead effect is continuously performed, corresponding to the look-ahead target hold of the first hold icon 9A. The hold icon to be changed is changed, an image representing the prefetched symbol is displayed in the hold icon, and the second prefetch effect is started. The first prefetching effect and the second prefetching effect are continued until the change corresponding to the prefetching target hold is performed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (D), a reach effect is executed. This reach effect is an effect that is executed during the change corresponding to the prefetch target hold. In this reach effect, the decorative pattern in the reach state is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the teammate character CRA and the second reserved icon 9C are displayed. The second hold icon 9C includes an image representing a prefetch symbol as a second prefetch effect. This reach effect is an effect performed by the variation that is the target of the first prefetch effect and the second prefetch effect.

  The first prefetch effects in the special prefetch effects A to E are executed when the number of holds (the number of first hold icons 9A) is a predetermined value or more (for example, 3 or more). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first prefetch effect may be executed regardless of the number of holds.

[Example of effects]
The following are examples of special prefetch effects.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 79 to 83, in the special prefetch effect, the second prefetch effect is configured to start after the first prefetch effect is started. According to this structure, interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 80, in the special prefetch effect B, the second prefetch effect is configured to end before the first prefetch effect ends. According to this structure, interest can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 81, in the special prefetch effect C, the first prefetch effect is configured to end before the second prefetch effect ends. According to this structure, interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 79 to 83, in the special prefetch effects A to E, the first prefetch effect is when the number of holds (the number of the first hold icons 9A) is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. The configuration is started. According to this structure, interest can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 79 to 81, in the special prefetch effects A to C, the first prefetch effect is executed on the display screen 7a, and the second prefetch effect is displayed on the display screen 7b. It is configured to be executed. According to this structure, interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of a special prefetch effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, five patterns of special prefetch effects A to E are implemented as special prefetch effects, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of patterns of A to E are included. You may make it implement the production which combined the pattern.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the special prefetch effects A to E, the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B are adjacent to each other. However, the present invention is limited to this. is not. For example, the first image display device 7A and / or the second image display device 7B may be moved to perform special prefetch effects A to E. Further, the special prefetch effects A to E may be performed in a state where the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B are separated by a predetermined distance.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the special prefetch effects A to E are performed, the first image display device 7A may be the main display device, the second image display device 7B may be the sub display device, The image display device 7A may be a sub display device, and the second image display device 7B may be a main display device. In this case, the main display device can be defined as a display device that takes longer to change the decorative design than the sub display device.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 79 to 82, in the special prefetch effects A to D, the first prefetch effect and the second prefetch effect are respectively executed on different display screens. The present invention is not limited to this, and the first prefetch effect and the second prefetch effect may be executed on the same display screen in the middle or from the beginning.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the special prefetching effect A, after the first prefetching effect and the b second prefetching effect are started, these two prefetching effects are ended until the fluctuations corresponding to the prefetch target hold respectively. In the special pre-reading effect B or the special pre-reading effect C, after the first pre-reading effect and the b second pre-reading effect are started, one of the pre-reading effects becomes a fluctuation corresponding to the pre-reading target hold. It is the composition which ends in. In these configurations, when the special prefetch effect A appears, the expectation of jackpot can be higher than when the special prefetch effect B or the special prefetch effect C appears. Alternatively, when the special pre-reading effect B or the special pre-reading effect C appears dare, a higher jackpot expectation may be used than when the special pre-reading effect A appears.

[Modification 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the special prefetching effect B is configured such that the second prefetching effect ends after the first prefetching effect and the b second prefetching effect are started until the fluctuation corresponding to the prefetch target hold. In the special pre-reading effect C, the first pre-reading effect ends after the first pre-reading effect and the b second pre-reading effect start until the fluctuation corresponding to the pre-reading target hold. In these configurations, when the special prefetch effect B appears in these configurations, the jackpot expectation can be higher than that when the special prefetch effect C appears. Conversely, when the special prefetch effect C appears, the jackpot expectation may be higher than when the special prefetch effect B appears.

[Modification 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the special prefetch effects A to D, the first prefetch effect and the second prefetch effect have the same prefetch target hold, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the prefetch The target hold may be different. For example, the prefetch target hold of the first prefetch effect may be a hold older than the prefetch target hold of the second prefetch effect, and the prefetch target hold of the first prefetch effect is from the prefetch target hold of the second prefetch effect. May also be a new hold.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
[Aspect B4-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects,
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one effect among the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is a prefetch effect of the first aspect as one of a plurality of prefetch effects,
The second display effect is a prefetch effect of the second aspect as one of a plurality of prefetch effects,
The second display effect is started after the first display effect is started.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B4-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect 1,
The second display effect may end before the first display effect ends.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B4-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect 1,
The first display effect may end before the second display effect ends.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B4-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 3,
The first display effect is executed when the number of holds is a predetermined value or more.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B4-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 4,
The display means includes first display means and second display means,
The first display effect is executed by the first display means, and the second display effect is executed by the second display means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  The stride reach effect and the music information display effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. Further, the reach reach effect and the music information display effect are effects that can be executed while the decorative design is changing, during the demonstration screen (demo screen), or during the customer waiting screen.

[Stride Reach Direction]
FIG. 84 is a diagram for explaining the span reach effect.
First, in the spanning effect, as shown in FIG. 84 (A), a change start effect is executed. In this change start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are changing are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the teammate character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7b.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (B), reach effect A is executed. In the reach effect A, the reach state is represented using the decorative symbols 8L and 8R on the display screen 7a. In the reach effect A, the teammate character CRA is continuously displayed on the display screen 7b. The reach production A includes a normal reach production with a relatively high jackpot expectation level and a super reach production with a relatively high jackpot expectation level. The super reach effect is an effect that may be developed and executed from the normal reach effect. In this reach production, the “6” symbol is reached.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (C), reach effect B is executed. In the reach effect B, the decorative symbols in the reach state are continuously displayed. In the reach effect B, the teammate character CRA is displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b.

[Music information display effect A]
FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining the music information display effect A.
First, in the music information display effect A, a demonstration screen display effect is executed as shown in FIG. In this demonstration screen display effect, the game information selection image B5A is displayed on the display screen 7a. The game information selection image B5A is an image for selecting one game information from a plurality of pieces of game information such as music information, light amount information, or volume information. In this demonstration screen display effect, the button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7b. The button image BTN represents the effect button 63. In other words, the button image BTN is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63. In this demonstration screen display effect, the player can select one piece of music information in the game information selection image B5A by operating the effect button 63. Note that the game information in the game information selection image B5A may include various information such as character information, game content information, and reach information in addition to the music information, the light amount information, or the volume information.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (B), a music selection effect is executed. In this music selection effect, the music selection image B5B is displayed so as to extend over the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. This music selection image B5B is an image for selecting one piece of music information from a plurality of pieces of music information such as music A, music B, or music C. In the music selection effect, the button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7b. In this music selection effect, the player can select one piece of music information in the music selection image B5B by operating the effect button 63.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (C), a music determination effect is executed. In this music determination effect, the music image B5C is displayed so as to extend over the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. This music image B5C is an image representing the music information determined by the music selection effect.

[Music information display effect B]
FIG. 86 is a diagram for explaining the music information display effect B. FIG.
First, in the music information display effect B, as shown in FIG. 86 (A), a change start effect is executed. In this change start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are changing are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the teammate character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7b.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (B), reach effect A is executed. In the reach effect A, the reach state is represented using the decorative symbols 8L and 8R on the display screen 7a. In the reach effect A, the teammate character CRA is continuously displayed on the display screen 7b. The reach production A includes a normal reach production with a relatively high jackpot expectation level and a super reach production with a relatively high jackpot expectation level. The super reach effect is an effect that may be developed and executed from the normal reach effect. In this reach production, the “6” symbol is reached.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (C), the music selection effect during the reach effect is executed. In this reach effect music selection effect, the music selection image B5D is displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. This music selection image B5D is an image for selecting one piece of music information from a plurality of pieces of music information such as music A, music B, or music C. Further, in the music selection effect during the reach effect, the reach state is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a using the decorative symbols 8L and 8R, and the teammate character CRA is continuously displayed on the display screen 7b. In the reach selection music selection effect, the player can select one piece of music information in the music selection image B5D by operating the select button 68.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (D), the music determination effect during the reach effect is executed. In this reach effect music determination effect, the music image B5E is displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. This music image B5E is an image representing the music information determined by the music selection effect. Further, in this music production effect during reach production, the reach state is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a using the decorative symbols 8L and 8R, and the teammate character CRA is continuously displayed on the display screen 7b.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (E), reach effect B is executed. In the reach effect B, the decorative symbols in the reach state are continuously displayed. In the reach effect B, the teammate character CRA is displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b.

[Music information display effect C]
FIG. 87 is a diagram for explaining the music information display effect C. FIG.
First, in the music information display effect C, a change start effect is executed as shown in FIG. 87 (A). In this change start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are changing are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the teammate character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7b.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (B), reach effect A is executed. In the reach effect A, the reach state is represented using the decorative symbols 8L and 8R on the display screen 7a. In the reach effect A, the teammate character CRA is continuously displayed on the display screen 7b. The reach production A includes a normal reach production with a relatively high jackpot expectation level and a super reach production with a relatively high jackpot expectation level. The super reach effect is an effect that may be developed and executed from the normal reach effect. In this reach production, the “6” symbol is reached.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (C), the music selection effect during the reach effect is executed. In this reach effect music selection effect, the music selection image B5D is displayed on the display screen 7b. This music selection image B5D is an image for selecting one piece of music information from a plurality of pieces of music information such as music A, music B, or music C. Further, in the music selection effect during the reach effect, the reach state is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a using the decorative symbols 8L and 8R, and the teammate character CRA is continuously displayed on the display screen 7b. In the reach selection music selection effect, the player can select one piece of music information in the music selection image B5D by operating the select button 68.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (D), a reach determination music determination effect is executed. In this reach effect music determination effect, the music image B5E is displayed on the display screen 7a. This music image B5E is an image representing the music information determined by the music selection effect. Further, in this music production effect during reach production, the reach state is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a using the decorative symbols 8L and 8R, and the teammate character CRA is continuously displayed on the display screen 7b.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (E), reach effect B is executed. In the reach effect B, the decorative symbols in the reach state are continuously displayed. In the reach effect B, the teammate character CRA is displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b.

[Music information display effect D]
FIG. 88 is a diagram for explaining the music information display effect D. FIG.
First, in the music information display effect B, a variation start effect is executed as shown in FIG. In this change start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are changing are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the teammate character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7b.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (B), reach effect A is executed. In the reach effect A, the reach state is represented using the decorative symbols 8L and 8R on the display screen 7a. In the reach effect A, the teammate character CRA is continuously displayed on the display screen 7b. The reach production A includes a normal reach production with a relatively high jackpot expectation level and a super reach production with a relatively high jackpot expectation level. The super reach effect is an effect that may be developed and executed from the normal reach effect. In this reach production, the “6” symbol is reached.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (C), the music selection effect during the reach effect is executed. In this reach effect music selection effect, the music selection image B5D is displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. This music selection image B5D is an image for selecting one piece of music information from a plurality of pieces of music information such as music A, music B, or music C. Further, in the music selection effect during the reach effect, the reach state is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a using the decorative symbols 8L and 8R, and the teammate character CRA is continuously displayed on the display screen 7b. In the reach selection music selection effect, the player can select one piece of music information in the music selection image B5D by operating the select button 68.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (D), the music determination effect during the reach effect is executed. In this reach effect music determination effect, the music image B5E is displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. This music image B5E is an image representing the music information determined by the music selection effect. Further, in this music production effect during reach production, the reach state is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a using the decorative symbols 8L and 8R, and the teammate character CRA is continuously displayed on the display screen 7b.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (E), reach effect B is executed. In the reach effect B, the decorative symbols in the reach state are continuously displayed. In the reach effect B, the teammate character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Example of effects]
Below, the example of an effect of a spanning reach production and a music information display production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 84 to 88, spanning reach effect using the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, and music information display using the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. Can be performed. According to this structure, interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 85 to 86 and 88, in the music information display effect, the music information such as the music selection image and the music image is displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. It is the composition to do. According to this structure, interest can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 84 and 86 to 88, in the span reach effect or the music information display effect, the reach effect (friend character CRA) spans the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. Is displayed. According to this structure, interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 86 to 88, in the music information display effect, the effect of displaying the music information such as the music selection image and the music image is performed during the reach effect. . According to this structure, interest can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 85 to 88, in the music information display effect, when the music selection image is displayed and the music is determined, the player selects the effect button 63 or the select button 68. The music is determined by operating. According to this structure, interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modified example of a spanning reach production and a music information display production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, four patterns of music information display effects A to D are implemented as the music information display effects, but the present invention is not limited to this and You may make it implement the production which combined the some pattern.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B are performed adjacent to each other in the spanning reach effect and the music information display effects A to D. It is not limited to this. For example, the first image display device 7A and / or the second image display device 7B may be moved to perform the span reach effect and the music information display effects AD. Moreover, you may make it perform straddle reach effect and music information display effect AD in the state where 7 A of 1st image display apparatuses and the 2nd image display apparatus 7B left | separated predetermined distance.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when performing the span reach effect and the music information display effects A to D, the first image display device 7A is the main display device, and the second image display device 7B is also the sub display device. Alternatively, the first image display device 7A may be a sub display device, and the second image display device 7B may be a main display device. In this case, the main display device can be defined as a display device that takes longer to change the decorative design than the sub display device.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, when performing the span reach effect and the music information display effects A to D, the decorative symbols used in the reach effect are displayed so as to straddle the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. Also good.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the music information display effects B to D, the music information such as the music selection image and the music image is displayed during the reach effect. The present invention is not limited, and an effect of displaying music information such as a music selection image or a music image during a change start effect or a jackpot game may be performed.

[Modification 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the music information display effects A to D, when the music selection image is displayed and the music is determined, the player operates the effect button 63 or the select button 68 to operate the music. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the music selection image is displayed and the music is determined, the music may be determined by arbitrary lottery or the like without depending on the player's operation.

[Modification 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the span reach effect or the music information display effects A to D are executed using the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, but the present invention is not limited to this. Further, in addition to the garage reach effect or the music information display effect A to D display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, the display may be executed using a plurality of display devices (display screens).

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
[B5-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects,
The display means includes a first display means and a second display means different from the first display means,
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one effect among the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is a reach effect,
The second display effect is a music display effect that displays music information of the game,
The first display effect may be performed using the first display means and the second display means,
The second display effect may be performed using the first display means and the second display means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[B5-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect 1,
In the second display effect, the music information is displayed across the first display means and the second display means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[B5-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect 1 or aspect 2,
In the first display effect, the reach effect is performed across the first display means and the second display means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[B5-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 3,
The second display effect is performed during the first display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[B5-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 4,
With operating means capable of accepting player operations,
Based on the operation of the operating means by the player, the second display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  The stride reach effect and the countdown effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. These effects are performed in parallel with changes in the effect symbol. The stride reach effect is executed when the reach is formed by the effect symbol. The countdown effect is executed as a countdown until a reach effect, or as a countdown until a determined effect for determining a jackpot.

[Stretching reach production A]
FIG. 89 is a diagram for explaining the cross reach effect A.
First, in the cross reach effect A, as shown in FIG. 89 (A), the change start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, the effect symbol is variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A. Further, the reserved image 9A, the reserved image 9B, and the reserved digested image 9C are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B.

  As one aspect following the variation start effect, a reach effect is executed as shown in FIG. 89 (B). In the reach effect, the effect symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol to form a reach. At this time, the effect symbols 8L and 8R that are temporarily stopped are displayed on both the display screens 7a and 7b. That is, “strand display” is performed across the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B.

  Further, following the temporary stop display of the effect symbols 8L and 8R in the reach effect, a display device movement effect is executed as shown in FIG. 89 (C). In the display device movement effect, the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B move in a direction in which they are close to each other (a direction in which the overlap is increased) and in a direction in which they are separated from each other (a direction in which the overlap is reduced). And repeat.

[Stretching reach production B]
FIG. 90 is a diagram for explaining the cross reach effect B. FIG.
First, in the straddle reach effect B, as shown in FIG. 90 (A), a change start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, the effect symbol is variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A. Further, the reserved image 9A, the reserved image 9B, and the reserved digested image 9C are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B.

  As one aspect following the variation start effect, a reach effect is executed as shown in FIG. In the reach effect, the effect symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol to form a reach. At this time, the effect symbols 8L and 8R that are temporarily stopped are displayed on both the display screens 7a and 7b. That is, “strand display” is performed across the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B.

  Further, following the temporary stop display of the effect symbols 8L and 8R in the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 90C, the symbol movement effect (1) is executed. In the symbol movement effect (1), as indicated by the arrows YG, the effect symbols 8L and 8R move to the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A while rotating about the vertical axis and are temporarily stopped and displayed. .

[Stretching Reach Production C]
FIG. 91 is a diagram for explaining the stride reach effect C.
First, in the crossing reach effect C, as shown in FIG. 91 (A), a change start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, the effect symbol is variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A. Further, the reserved image 9A, the reserved image 9B, and the reserved digested image 9C are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B.

  As one aspect following the change start effect, a reach effect is executed as shown in FIG. 91 (B). In the reach effect, the effect symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol to form a reach. At this time, the effect symbols 8L and 8R that are temporarily stopped are displayed on both the display screens 7a and 7b. That is, “strand display” is performed across the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B.

  Further, following the temporary stop display of the effect symbols 8L and 8R in the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 91 (C), the symbol movement effect (2) is executed. In the symbol movement effect (2), the effect symbols 8L and 8R are moved to the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B and temporarily stopped as indicated by the arrow YG.

[Countdown production A]
FIG. 92 is a diagram for explaining the countdown effect A. FIG.
First, in the countdown effect A, as shown in FIG. 92 (A), a change start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, the effect symbol is variably displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A. In addition, the reserved images 9A and 9B and the reserved digested image 9C are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B.

  As one aspect following the variation start effect, the count effect (1) is executed as shown in FIG. In the count effect (1), the count image CG (“5” in FIG. 92B) is displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A. After that, the count image CG is displayed as “4” → “3” → “2” → “1”.

  When the count image CG becomes “0”, a reach effect is executed as shown in FIG. In the reach effect, the effect symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol to form a reach. At this time, the effect symbols 8L and 8R that are temporarily stopped are displayed on both the display screens 7a and 7b. That is, “strand display” is performed across the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B.

[Countdown production B]
FIG. 93 is a diagram for explaining the countdown effect B. FIG.
First, in the countdown effect B, as shown in FIG. 93A, a reach effect is executed following the change start effect. In the reach effect, the effect symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol to form a reach. At this time, the effect symbols 8L and 8R that are temporarily stopped are displayed on both the display screens 7a and 7b. That is, “strand display” is performed across the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B.

  As one aspect following the reach effect, a count effect (2) is executed as shown in FIG. In the count effect (2), the count image CG (“5” in FIG. 93B) is displayed on both the display screens 7a and 7b. That is, “strand display” is performed across the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B. After that, the count image CG is displayed as “4” → “3” → “2” → “1”.

  When the count image CG becomes “0”, as shown in FIG. 93 (C), a pattern matching effect is executed. In the design matching effect, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol. At this time, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are temporarily stopped are displayed on both the display screens 7a and 7b. That is, the display across the display devices 7A and 7B is performed.

[Example of effects]
Below, the example of an effect in this embodiment is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 89 to 93, it is possible to display the image straddling the image display devices 7A and 7B. Specifically, reach production (FIG. 89 (B), FIG. 90 (B), FIG. 91 (B), FIG. 92 (C), FIG. 93 (A)), display device movement production (FIG. 89 (C)). In the counter effect (2) (FIG. 93 (B)) and the pattern matching effect (FIG. 93 (C)), the straddle display is performed. According to this configuration, it is possible to give force to the display of the numeric image in the production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a display device movement effect is executed as shown in FIG. In the display device movement effect, the movement in the direction in which the two display devices 7A and 7B are close to each other (the direction in which the overlap is large) and the movement in the direction in which they are separated from each other (the direction in which the overlap is small) are repeated. According to this configuration, in combination with the straddle display, it is possible to give force to the display of the numerical image, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the reach effect (FIG. 89 (B), FIG. 90 (B), FIG. 91 (B), FIG. 92 (C), FIG. 93 (A)), the display device movement effect (FIG. 89). (C)), in the design matching effect (FIG. 93C), the effect symbol straddling display is performed. According to this configuration, it is possible to give force to the display of the effect design, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the stride display is performed in the reach effect (FIG. 89 (B), FIG. 90 (B), FIG. 91 (B), FIG. 92 (C), FIG. 93 (A)). According to this configuration, the reach production can be powerful and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the symbol movement effect is executed. In the symbol movement effect (1), as shown in FIG. 90C, the effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the first image display device 7A while rotating around the vertical axis as indicated by the arrow YG. The screen is moved to the screen 7a and temporarily stopped. In the symbol movement effect (2), as shown in FIG. 91 (C), the effect symbols 8L and 8R move to the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B as indicated by the arrow YG to display the temporary stop. Is done. According to this configuration, since the effect symbol moves after being displayed in a straddling manner, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the count image CG is displayed across the count effect (2) (FIG. 93B). Thereby, force can be given to count production (2) and the interest of a game can be improved.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 92B, in the count effect (1), the count image CG is displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 93B, in the count effect (2), the count image CG is displayed across the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A and the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B ( Straddle display). According to this configuration, the count effect can be widened, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification in this embodiment is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 89 to FIG. 93, the stride display of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R and the straddle display of the count image CG are given as examples. It is not limited to this. Since the number image may be displayed across the screen, for example, the acquired number of balls (including numerical values based on the number of balls), the number of consecutive games, the number of prize balls, the number of rounds, and the like may be displayed as a number image.

[Modification 2]
As shown in FIGS. 89 to 93, the gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment has a configuration including the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The configuration may include three or more image display devices. At this time, straddle display across the display screens of three or more image display devices may be performed.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 89C, the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B are moved in the vertical direction so as to overlap each other. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is good also as a structure which moves to the left-right direction or the diagonal direction. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which moves so that a 3 or more display apparatus may mutually change a relative position.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
[Aspect B6-1]
A plurality of display devices capable of displaying numerical images;
A display control means for displaying the numeric image on the display device, and a gaming machine comprising:
The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the display control means enables a display in which the numeric image straddles the plurality of display devices.

[Aspect B6-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect B6-1,
Furthermore, the drive control means that can move the plurality of display devices and change the relative position of the display devices,
The game machine characterized in that the drive control means can change the relative position of the display device in parallel with the spanning display by the display control means.

[Aspect B6-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect B6-1 or aspect B6-2,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the display control means enables the straddle display when temporarily displaying an effect symbol as the numeric image.

[Aspect B6-4]
A gaming machine according to Aspect B6-4,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the display control means performs temporary stop display of the effect symbol by the straddle display at the time of reach effect.

[Aspect B6-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect B6-3 or aspect B6-4,
The display control means moves the effect symbol to any one of the plurality of display devices following the temporary stop display of the effect symbol by the straddling display.

[Aspect B6-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspect B6-1 to aspect B6-5,
The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the display control means enables the straddle display in a count display for displaying the numeric images in a predetermined order.

[Aspect B6-7]
A gaming machine according to Aspect B6-6,
The display control means is capable of performing a first count display in which the count display is performed by the spanning display and a second count display in which the count display is performed by any one of the plurality of display devices. To play.

  Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 94 to 98, the rose-racking effect, the normal reach-losing effect, and the symbol promotion display effect will be described. These effects are performed in parallel with the change display of the effect symbols. The rose losing effect is a losing effect when the effect symbol stops without reaching reach. The normal reach losing effect is a losing effect in which the effect symbols reach and then stop without developing into SP reach or the like. The symbol promotion display effect is an effect as to whether or not the symbol promotion symbol is promoted after the jackpot is confirmed.

[Barajazu directing]
FIG. 94 is a diagram for explaining the barahaze effect.
First, as shown in FIG. 94 (A), the variation start effect is executed in the barahazzle effect. In this variation start effect, the effect symbol is variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A. Further, the reserved image 9A, the reserved image 9B, and the reserved digested image 9C are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B.

  As one aspect following the variation start effect, the middle symbol variation effect (1) is executed as shown in FIG. 94 (B). In the middle symbol variation effect (1), the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A without forming reach, and on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A. The effect symbol 8C, which is a middle symbol, is variably displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 94 (C), a rose losing effect is executed. In the rose losing effect, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are confirmed and stopped after the effect symbol 8C, which is the middle symbol, is temporarily stopped and displayed.

[Normal reach loss production A]
FIG. 95 is a diagram for explaining the normal reach lose effect A. FIG.
In the normal reach lose effect A, after the reach start effect is formed by the effect symbols 8L and 8R, the middle symbol change effect (2) is executed as shown in FIG. 95 (A). In the middle symbol variation effect (2), the middle symbol effect symbol is variably displayed across the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B. Specifically, it is displayed so as to flow from the upper part to the lower part of the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A, and then displayed so as to flow from the upper part to the lower part of the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B. .

  Next, as shown in FIG. 95 (B), the medium symbol temporary stop effect (1) is executed. In the middle symbol temporary stop effect (1), the effect symbol 8C, which is the middle symbol, is temporarily stopped and displayed. At this time, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A, while the effect symbol 8C which is a middle symbol is temporarily displayed on the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B. Stopped display.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 95 (C), the middle symbol movement effect (1) is executed. In the middle symbol movement effect (1), the effect symbol 8C temporarily stopped and displayed on the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B moves to the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A as indicated by an arrow YG. Then, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are confirmed and stopped on the display screen 7a.

[Normal reach loss production B]
FIG. 96 is a diagram for explaining the normal reach lose effect B.
In the normal reach lose effect B, the reach symbol is formed by the effect symbols 8L and 8R following the change start effect, and then the middle symbol change effect (2) is executed as shown in FIG. 96 (A). In the middle symbol variation effect (2), the middle symbol effect symbol is variably displayed across the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B. Specifically, it is displayed so as to flow from the upper part to the lower part of the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A, and then displayed so as to flow from the upper part to the lower part of the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B. .

  Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (B), the medium symbol temporary stop effect (2) is executed. In the middle symbol temporary stop effect (2), the effect symbol 8C, which is the middle symbol, is temporarily stopped and displayed. At this time, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A, while the effect symbol 8C, which is the middle symbol, is displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A and the second image symbol. It is displayed across the display screen 7b of the two-image display device 7B. That is, the upper part of the effect symbol 8C is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the lower part of the effect symbol 8C is “strand display” displayed on the display screen 7b.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (C), the middle symbol movement effect (2) is executed. In the middle symbol movement effect (2), the effect symbol 8C that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the straddling display mode moves to the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A as indicated by the arrow YG. Then, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are confirmed and stopped on the display screen 7a.

[Design promotion display effect A]
FIG. 97 is a diagram for explaining the symbol promotion display effect A.
In the symbol promotion display effect A, after the reach start effect is formed by the effect symbols 8L and 8R, as shown in FIG. 97 (A), the symbol matching effect indicating the big hit is executed. In the pattern matching effect, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (B), the symbol promotion effect (1) is executed. In the symbol promotion effect (1), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R temporarily stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A are displayed small so that they move to the back of the display screen, and then forward again. The effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as if they were headed. At this time, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed across the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A and the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B. That is, the upper part of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the lower part of the effect symbol 8C is “stretch display” displayed on the display screen 7b. In addition, there are a case where the symbol is promoted to a probability variation symbol and a case where the original symbol is not promoted. In FIG. 97 (B), the state of being promoted to “7”, which is a probability variation symbol, is shown.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (C), a symbol movement effect (1) is executed. In the symbol movement effect (1), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R temporarily stopped and displayed in a straddling display mode move to the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A as indicated by an arrow YG. Then, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are confirmed and stopped on the display screen 7a.

[Design promotion display effect B]
FIG. 98 is a diagram for explaining the symbol promotion display effect B. FIG.
In the symbol promotion display effect B, a reach is formed by the effect symbols 8L and 8R following the variation start effect, and then a symbol matching effect indicating a big hit is executed as shown in FIG. 98 (A). In the pattern matching effect, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (B), the symbol promotion effect (2) is executed. In the symbol promotion effect (2), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are temporarily stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A are displayed small so that they move to the back of the display screen, and then forward again. The effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as if they were headed. At this time, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed across the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A and the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B. That is, the upper part of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the lower part of the effect symbol 8C is “stretch display” displayed on the display screen 7b. Moreover, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are large symbols that are stretched in the vertical direction and occupy most of the display screens 7a and 7b. In addition, there are a case where the symbol is promoted to a probability variation symbol and a case where the original symbol is not promoted. FIG. 98 (B) shows a state in which it is promoted to “7”, which is a probable variation pattern.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (C), a symbol movement effect (2) is executed. In the symbol movement effect (2), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R temporarily stopped and displayed in a straddling display mode move to the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B as indicated by an arrow YG. Then, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are confirmed and stopped on the display screen 7b.

[Example of effects]
Below, the example of an effect in this embodiment is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 94 to 98, the effect design is temporarily stopped on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A and the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B. Display and then move to the other. Further, the effect design is displayed across the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A and the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B, and then moved to one of the display screens 7a and 7b. According to this configuration, since the temporary stop display is changed in the change display of the effect symbol, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 95 (B), after the effect design 8C, which is the middle design, is temporarily stopped and displayed on the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B, ), The effect symbol 8C is moved to the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A to be confirmed and stopped. Also, as shown in FIG. 96 (B), the effect design 8C as the middle design is displayed across the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A and the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B. As shown in 96 (C), the effect symbol 8C is moved to the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A to be confirmed and stopped. According to this configuration, a change in the temporary stop display of the medium symbol during normal reach can be made, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 95 (A) and FIG. 96 (A), the effect symbol which is the middle symbol is the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A and the second image display device. 7B is displayed in a variable manner across the display screen 7b. According to this configuration, since the variation of the medium symbol after reach formation becomes dynamic as compared with the rose losing effect shown in FIG. 94, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 97 and FIG. 98, the effect symbols that are temporarily stopped and moved are the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that indicate the jackpot. According to this structure, since the display of the effect symbol at the time of the big hit becomes a powerful display, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 97 (B) and 98 (B), the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A and the display of the second image display device 7B are displayed during the symbol promotion effect. The display straddling the screen 7b is performed, and thereafter, the display is moved to either the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A or the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B. According to this configuration, since the symbol promotion display effect at the time of the big hit becomes a powerful display, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification in this embodiment is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 95 to 98, the normal reach loss effect and the symbol promotion display effect have been described as examples. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the present invention may be applied not only to the normal reach loss effect, but also to the effect symbols that are fluctuating, such as the effect per normal reach, the SP reach reach effect, the SP reach effect, the rose lose effect, and the like.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 95 (B), FIG. 95 (C), FIG. 96 (B), and FIG. The subsequent movement was explained. On the other hand, if the effect symbol that stops third is the right symbol or the left symbol, the symbol may be temporarily stopped and then moved.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 95 (A) and 96 (A), the effect design 8C, which is a middle design, varies across the display screens 7a and 7b. On the other hand, if the effect symbol that stops third is the right symbol or the left symbol, the symbol may be changed across the display screens 7a and 7b.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, the symbol promotion display effect has been described as an example. On the other hand, in the case of the jackpot decision effect, the straddle display of the three effect symbols and the subsequent movement may be performed.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
[Aspect B7-1]
A plurality of display devices capable of displaying production symbols;
A display control means for displaying the effect symbol on the display device, and a gaming machine comprising:
In the temporary stop display of the effect symbol, the display control means displays the effect symbol across the first image display device or the first image display device and the second image display device, and then displays the effect symbol in the A game machine, wherein the game machine moves to the second image display device and performs a fixed stop display.

[Aspect B7-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect B7-1,
The game machine is characterized in that the effect symbol is the remaining one final stop effect symbol when reach is formed by two effect symbols.

[Aspect B7-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect B7-2,
The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the display control means variably displays the final stop effect symbol across the first image display device and the second image display device when the reach is formed.

[Aspect B7-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect B7-1,
The game machine is characterized in that the effect symbols are three jackpot effect symbols indicating that the game has been a jackpot.

[Aspect B7-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect B7-4,
The display control means, in the promotion effect to the probability variation jackpot effect design showing the probability variation jackpot, to change the jackpot effect symbol to the probability variation jackpot effect symbol, or without changing, to perform the straddle display, A game machine, wherein the game machine moves to the second image display device and performs a fixed stop display.

  The count effects A to E will be described below with reference to FIGS. This count effect is an effect related to the decorative effect variation effect.

[Counting effect A]
FIG. 99 is a diagram for explaining the count effect A.
This count effect A is performed during the decorative effect change effect. First, as shown in FIG. 99 (A), the reach effect is executed. This reach effect is an effect performed during the reach state in which the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are the same symbol. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols in the reach state are displayed on the display screen 7a. In the reach effect, the teammate character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7b. The reach production includes a normal reach production with a relatively low jackpot expectation and a super reach production with a relatively high jackpot expectation. The super reach effect is an effect that may be developed and executed from the normal reach effect. In this reach production, the “6” symbol is reached.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (B), countdown effect A is executed. In this countdown effect A, the movable board 15 is moved to the unfolded position, so that the movable board 15 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, and the player sees on the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. The countdown display image C1A is displayed in a display area that does not overlap the movable board 15. The countdown display image C1A is an image representing a countdown starting from “10”. A part of the countdown display image C1A is displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 99C, a countdown effect B is executed. In this countdown effect B, the state where the panel movable body 15 is arranged in front of the predetermined areas of the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b is continued, and the panel movable body 15 is viewed from the player on the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. The countdown display image C1A is continuously displayed in the display area that does not overlap with the display area. In FIG. 99C, the countdown display image C1A shows that the countdown has advanced to “1”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (D), a jackpot notification effect is executed. In this jackpot notification effect, the state in which the movable board 15 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b is continued and does not overlap with the movable board 15 as viewed from the player on the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. The jackpot notification image C1B is displayed in the display area. This jackpot notification image C1B is an image that suggests a jackpot to the player, and is indicated as “hit”.

[Counting effect B]
FIG. 100 is a diagram for explaining the count effect B. FIG.
This count effect B is performed during the decorative effect variation effect. First, as shown in FIG. 100A, the reach effect is executed. This reach effect is an effect performed during the reach state in which the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are the same symbol. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols in the reach state are displayed on the display screen 7a. In the reach effect, the teammate character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7b. The reach production includes a normal reach production with a relatively low jackpot expectation and a super reach production with a relatively high jackpot expectation. The super reach effect is an effect that may be developed and executed from the normal reach effect. In this reach production, the “6” symbol is reached.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (B), countdown effect A is executed. In this countdown effect A, the movable board 15 is moved to the unfolded position, so that the movable board 15 is arranged in front of a predetermined area of the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. In the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, the game The countdown display image C1A is displayed in a display area that does not overlap with the movable board body 15 when viewed from the user. The countdown display image C1A is an image representing a countdown starting from “10”. A part of the countdown display image C1A is displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (C), countdown effect B is executed. In this countdown effect B, the state where the panel movable body 15 is arranged in front of the predetermined areas of the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b is continued, and the panel movable body 15 is viewed from the player on the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. A button press-promoting image C1C is displayed in a display area that does not overlap, and a button image BTN is further displayed. The button pressing promotion image C1C is displayed after the countdown of the countdown display image C1A becomes “1”, and is an image for prompting the player to press the effect button 63. The button image BTN represents the effect button 63. In other words, the button image BTN is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 100D, a jackpot notification effect is executed. In this jackpot notification effect, the state in which the panel movable body 15 is arranged in front of a predetermined area of the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b is continued, and the panel movable body 15 is viewed from the player on the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. The jackpot notification image C1B is displayed in a display area that does not overlap with the display area. This jackpot notification image C1B is an image that suggests a jackpot to the player, and is indicated as “hit”.

[Counting effect C]
FIG. 101 is a diagram for explaining the count effect C. FIG.
This count effect C is performed during the decorative effect change effect. First, as shown in FIG. 101 (A), the reach effect is executed. This reach effect is an effect performed during the reach state in which the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are the same symbol. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols in the reach state are displayed on the display screen 7a. In the reach effect, the teammate character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7b. The reach production includes a normal reach production with a relatively low jackpot expectation and a super reach production with a relatively high jackpot expectation. The super reach effect is an effect that may be developed and executed from the normal reach effect. In this reach production, the “6” symbol is reached.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (B), countdown effect A is executed. In this countdown effect A, the movable board 15 is moved to the unfolded position, so that the movable board 15 is arranged in front of a predetermined area of the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. In the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, the game The countdown display image C1A is displayed in a display area that does not overlap with the movable board body 15 when viewed from the user. The countdown display image C1A is an image representing a countdown starting from “10”. A part of the countdown display image C1A is displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (C), countdown effect B is executed. In this countdown effect B, the state in which the panel movable body 15 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b is continued, and the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b do not overlap with the panel movable body 15 when viewed from the player. A button press promotion image C1C is displayed in the display area, and a button image BTN is further displayed. The button pressing promotion image C1C is displayed after the countdown of the countdown display image C1A becomes “1”, and is an image for prompting the player to press the effect button 63. The button image BTN represents the effect button 63. In other words, the button image BTN is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (D), a jackpot notification effect is executed. In this jackpot notification effect, it rotates when it comes from the state where the panel movable body 15 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. Further, in the jackpot notification effect, the jackpot notification image C1B is displayed in a display area that does not overlap the movable board body 15 when viewed from the player on the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. This jackpot notification image C1B is an image that suggests a jackpot to the player, and is indicated as “hit”.

[Counting effect D]
FIG. 102 is a diagram for explaining the count effect D.
This count effect D is performed during the decorative effect change effect, and first, the reach effect is executed as shown in FIG. This reach effect is an effect performed during the reach state in which the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are the same symbol. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols in the reach state are displayed on the display screen 7a. In the reach effect, the teammate character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7b. The reach production includes a normal reach production with a relatively low jackpot expectation and a super reach production with a relatively high jackpot expectation. The super reach effect is an effect that may be developed and executed from the normal reach effect. In this reach production, the “6” symbol is reached.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (B), a countdown effect A is executed. In this countdown effect A, the movable board 15 is moved to the unfolded position, so that the movable board 15 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, and the player sees on the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. The countdown display image C1A is displayed in a display area that does not overlap the movable board 15. The countdown display image C1A is an image representing a countdown starting from “10”. A part of the countdown display image C1A is displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (C), countdown effect B is executed. In this countdown effect B, the state in which the panel movable body 15 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b is continued, and the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b do not overlap with the panel movable body 15 when viewed from the player. A button press promotion image C1C is displayed in the display area, and a button image BTN is further displayed. The button pressing promotion image C1C is displayed after the countdown of the countdown display image C1A becomes “1”, and is an image for prompting the player to press the effect button 63. The button image BTN represents the effect button 63. In other words, the button image BTN is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (D), a jackpot notification effect is executed. In this jackpot notification effect, the movable panel 15 is emitted in a predetermined color (for example, rainbow) while the state in which the movable panel 15 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. Inform the player. Further, in the jackpot notification effect, the jackpot notification image C1B is displayed in a display area that does not overlap the movable board body 15 when viewed from the player on the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. This jackpot notification image C1B is an image that suggests a jackpot to the player, and is indicated as “hit”.

[Count production E]
FIG. 103 is a diagram for explaining the count effect E. FIG.
This count effect E uses only the display screen 7a without using the display screen 7b.
This count effect E is performed during the decorative effect variation effect. First, as shown in FIG. 103 (A), the reach effect is executed. This reach effect is an effect performed during the reach state in which the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are the same symbol. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols in the reach state are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the teammate character CRA is displayed. The reach production includes a normal reach production with a relatively low jackpot expectation and a super reach production with a relatively high jackpot expectation. The super reach effect is an effect that may be developed and executed from the normal reach effect. In this reach production, the “6” symbol is reached.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (B), countdown effect A is executed. In this countdown effect A, the movable board 15 moves to the unfolded position, so that the movable board 15 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a and does not overlap with the movable board 15 when viewed from the player on the display screen 7a. A countdown display image C1A is displayed in the display area. The countdown display image C1A is an image representing a countdown starting from “10”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (C), countdown effect B is executed. In this countdown effect B, the state in which the movable board 15 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a is continued, and the countdown display image C1A is displayed in a display area that does not overlap with the movable board 15 when viewed from the player on the display screen 7a. Display continues. In FIG. 103 (C), the countdown display image C1A shows that the countdown has progressed to “1”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (D), a jackpot notification effect is executed. In this jackpot notification effect, the state in which the movable board 15 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a is continued, and the big hit notification image C1B is displayed in a display area that does not overlap with the movable board 15 when viewed from the player on the display screen 7a. Is displayed. This jackpot notification image C1B is an image that suggests a jackpot to the player, and is indicated as “hit”.

[Example of effects]
The following is an example of the effect of the count effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 99 to 103, the board movable body 15 is moved from the home position to the deployed position, and the board movable body is in front of a predetermined area of the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. 15 is stopped, and at that time, a countdown display image is displayed in a display area that does not overlap the movable board 15 when viewed from the player on the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. According to this structure, the effect of the board movable body 15 and the countdown effect can be enjoyed at the same time, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 99 to 103, the effect of the movable board 15 is performed, and the display screen 7 a and the display screen 7 b do not overlap with the movable board 15 as viewed from the player. When a countdown display image is displayed in the display area and the countdown display reaches a predetermined value, a jackpot notification effect is performed. According to this configuration, the jackpot notification effect can be emphasized, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 101 to 102, when the button image BTN is displayed in the countdown effect and the player operates the effect button 63, the board is movable in the jackpot notification effect. The configuration of the body 15 is changed by rotating or changing the color. According to this structure, since the aspect of the board movable body 15 changes, the interest of a game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 102, when the button image BTN is displayed in the countdown effect and the player operates the effect button 63, in the jackpot notification effect, It is configured to change the color. According to this structure, since the color of the board movable body 15 changes, the interest of a game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 99 to 102, the board movable body 15 is moved from the home position to the unfolded position, and a predetermined area formed on both the display screen 7 a and the display screen 7 b. An effect of stopping the movable board 15 in front is performed. According to this configuration, it is possible to enjoy the effects of the movable board 15 arranged in front of the two display devices, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of count production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, five patterns of count effects A to E are implemented as count effects, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of patterns of A to E are used. You may make it implement the production which combined.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the count effects AD are performed in a state where the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B are adjacent to each other, but the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, the first image display device 7A and / or the second image display device 7B may be moved to perform the on-hold display decoration symbol effects A to E. Further, the count effects A to D may be performed in a state where the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B are separated from each other by a predetermined distance.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the count effects A to D are performed, the first image display device 7A may be the main display device, the second image display device 7B may be the sub display device, or the first image. The display device 7A may be a sub display device, and the second image display device 7B may be a main display device. In this case, the main display device can be defined as a display device that takes longer to change the decorative design than the sub display device.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the count effects A to E are performed, the countdown effect is shifted to the jackpot notification effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the countdown effect, the process may shift to a loss notification effect for notifying a loss.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the count effects A to D, the board movable body 15 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b by moving the board movable body 15 to the expanded position, and the display screen 7a. In the display screen 7b, the countdown display image C1A is displayed in a display area that does not overlap with the board movable body 15 when viewed from the player, and the display area that does not overlap with the board movable body 15 when viewed from the player is: Two each is formed, and the two display areas are formed by the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, respectively, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, one display area that does not overlap the board movable body 15 when viewed from the player may be formed, or three or more display areas may be formed. Alternatively, the display area thus formed may be formed by the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, or may be formed by either the display screen 7a or the display screen 7b.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
[Aspect C1-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects, a movable accessory, and an operation unit operable by a player,
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one effect among the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect effect in which the movable accessory is moved from a first position to a second position and the movable accessory is rendered in front of the first area of the display means. ,
The second display effect is a timer display effect for executing a timer display in a second region adjacent to the first region of the display means,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed when the first display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C1-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect 1,
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The third display effect is an operation display effect that displays an operation unit image representing the operation unit in the second area of the display unit.
The combination effect is an effect that may include the third display effect,
In the combination effect, when the timer value of the timer display in the second display effect becomes a predetermined value, the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C1-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect 2,
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a fourth display effect may be performed.
The fourth display effect is an effect of changing the mode of the movable accessory from the first mode to the second mode,
The combination effect is an effect that may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, after the third display effect, when the player operates the operation unit, the fourth display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C1-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect 3,
The fourth display effect is an effect of changing the color of the movable accessory from the first color to the second color.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C1-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 4,
The display means includes a first display means and a second display means different from the first display means,
The first area of the display means is formed by the first display means and the second display means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  The accessory-linked display effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. This accessory-linked display effect can be executed during the decorative effect change effect or the reach effect (super reach effect). That is, when the microcomputer for image control 101 analyzes the change effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the accessory-linked display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed. This is a display effect displayed on the screens 7a and 7b.

[Linkage display effect A]
FIG. 104 is a diagram for explaining an accessory-linked display effect A. In the accessory-linked display effect A, first, the left-handed item linked display effect in FIG. 104 (A) is executed. In this left-hand-object-linked display effect, the first image display device 7A is located on the upper side, and the second image display device 7B is located on the lower side. The panel movable combination 15 (upper movable combination) is stationary at the advanced position (deployment position), and the panel movable combination 15 (left movable combination) is located in front of a part of the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A. Object and right movable accessory) are located.

  In this state, a light emission effect is produced in which one of the left side (left movable accessory) of the movable board accessory 15 (upper movable accessory) emits light. A specific image S1 representing a specific target is displayed using the display screens 7a and 7b of both the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B in accordance with the light emission effect of the left movable accessory. Specifically, the upper image IM11 displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A is visually connected to the lower image IM21 displayed on the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B. Thus, a light emission image S1 that represents the streak of light as a whole is configured. That is, the light emission image S1 is displayed across the display screens 7a and 7b. The luminescent image S1 is displayed as if it is emitting light from the left movable accessory.

  Next, the right-handed item linked display effect shown in FIG. 104 (B) is executed. Specifically, a light emission effect is performed in which one of the right side (right side movable accessory) of the movable board accessory 15 (upper side movable accessory) emits light. A specific image S2 representing a specific target is displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A in accordance with the light emission effect of the right movable accessory. Specifically, the upper image IM12 displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A constitutes a light emission image S2 representing a light streak. The light emission image S2 is not displayed on the display screen 7b. The luminescent image S2 is displayed as if it is emitting light from the right movable accessory. The right movable accessory executes a light emission effect in a state where a part of the first image display device 7A is covered.

[Linkage display effect B]
FIG. 105 is a diagram for explaining a combination-linked display effect B. Compared to the accessory-linked display effect A in FIG. 104, the accessory-linked display effect B differs in the relative positional relationship between the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B and the display content of the display effect. . In the left-handed character linked display effect in FIG. 105 (A), the panel movable character 15 (upper movable character) is stationary at the advanced position (deployed position) as in the case-linked character display effect A in FIG. . The first image display device 7A is located on the left side, and the second image display device 7B is located on the right side. The panel movable combination 15 (upper movable combination) is stationary at the advanced position (deployment position), and the panel movable combination 15 (left movable combination) is located in front of a part of the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A. Object and right movable accessory) are located.

  In this state, a light emission effect is produced in which one of the left side (left movable accessory) of the movable board accessory 15 (upper movable accessory) emits light. A specific image S1 representing a specific target is displayed using the display screens 7a and 7b of both the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B in accordance with the light emission effect of the left movable accessory. Specifically, the upper image IM11 displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A is visually connected to the lower image IM21 displayed on the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B. Thus, a light emission image S1 that represents the streak of light as a whole is configured. That is, the light emission image S1 is displayed across the display screens 7a and 7b. The luminescent image S1 is displayed as if it is emitting light from the left movable accessory.

  Next, the right-handed item linked display effect shown in FIG. 105 (B) is executed. Specifically, a light emission effect is performed in which one of the right side (right side movable accessory) of the movable board accessory 15 (upper side movable accessory) emits light. A specific image S2 representing a specific target is displayed on the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B in accordance with the light emission effect of the right movable accessory. Specifically, the upper image IM22 displayed on the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B constitutes a light emission image S2 representing a light streak. The light emission image S2 is not displayed on the display screen 7a. The luminescent image S2 is displayed as if it is emitting light from the right movable accessory. The right movable accessory executes a light emission effect in a state where a part of the first image display device 7A is covered.

[Function-linked display effect C]
FIG. 106 is a diagram for explaining a combination-linked display effect C. The effect-linked display effect C differs from the effect-linked display effect A of FIG. 104 in the effect content of the movable board accessory 15 and the display content of the display effect. In the left-handed character linked display effect of FIG. 106 (A), the panel movable character 15 (upper movable character) is stationary at the advanced position (deployed position), similarly to the character-linked character display effect A of FIG. . The first image display device 7A is located on the upper side, and the second image display device 7B is located on the lower side. The panel movable combination 15 (upper movable combination) is stationary at the advanced position (deployment position), and the panel movable combination 15 (left movable combination) is located in front of a part of the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A. Object and right movable accessory) are located.

  In this state, a moving effect is performed in which one of the left side of the board movable accessory 15 (upper movable accessory) (left movable accessory) moves up and down. A specific image S1 representing a specific target is displayed using the display screens 7a and 7b of both the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B in accordance with the vertical movement effect of the left movable accessory. Specifically, the upper image IM11 displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A is visually connected to the lower image IM21 displayed on the display screen 7b of the second image display device 7B. Thus, a specific image S1 is formed that represents a star-shaped figure as a whole. That is, the specific image (star-shaped graphic image) S1 is displayed across the display screens 7a and 7b. The specific image S1 may be moved up and down on the display screens 7a and 7b.

  Next, the right-handed item linked display effect shown in FIG. 106 (B) is executed. Specifically, a moving effect is performed in which one of the right side of the board movable accessory 15 (upper movable accessory) (the right movable accessory) moves left and right. A specific image S2 representing a specific target is displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A in accordance with the left-right movement effect of the right movable accessory. Specifically, a specific image S2 representing a character is configured by the upper image IM12 displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7A. The specific image S2 is not displayed on the display screen 7a. The specific image S2 may be moved left and right on the display screens 7a and 7b. The right movable accessory performs a movement effect in a state where a part of the first image display device 7A is covered.

[Example of effects]
Below, the example of an effect of an accessory linked display effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 104 to 106, the first image display device 7 </ b> A and the second image are displayed when the left movable accessory of the panel movable accessory 15 is executing the light emission effect. When the specific image S1 (for example, a light emission image) is displayed on both of the display devices 7B and the right side movable accessory of the panel movable accessory 15 is performing a light emission effect, the specific image S2 is displayed on the first image display device 7A. (For example, a light emission image) is displayed, and the specific image S2 is not displayed on the second image display device 7B. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Effect Example 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 104 to 106, the board movable accessory 15 (right movable accessory) is executing a specific effect (light emission effect, movement effect, etc.) A part of the first image display device 7A is covered. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Effect Example 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 104 to 106, the board movable accessory 15 (left movable accessory) is executing a specific effect (light emission effect, movement effect, etc.) A part of the first image display device 7A is covered. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Effect Example 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, the specific effect of the board movable accessory 15 (left movable accessory) is a light emission effect. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Effect Example 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, the specific effect of the board movable accessory 15 (right movable accessory) is a light emission effect. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Effect Example 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 104 to 106, the left movable accessory and the right movable accessory of the board movable accessory 15 are configured to be movable. According to this structure, a player can be entertained visually and an interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of an accessory linked display effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the left movable accessory and the right movable accessory of the board movable accessory 15 are configured to be movable. However, at least one of the left and right movable combinations of the panel movable combination 15 may be configured so that it cannot move.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the specific images S1 and S2 are light-emitting images and character images. However, the specific objects represented by the specific images S1 and S2 mean all objects that can be recognized as one independent object, and in addition to images such as characters and objects, abstract figures and characters. , Symbols, smoke, lines, afterimages, and the like.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
◇ [Aspect C2-1]
First display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
A second display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
A first character capable of performing the first performance;
A gaming machine comprising a second accessory capable of executing a second performance,
When the first accessory is performing the first effect, a first image is displayed on both the first display means and the second display means,
When the second accessory is executing the second effect, the second image is displayed on the first display means, and the second image is displayed on the second display means. Not
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C2-2]
The gaming machine according to claim 1,
The second accessory covers a part of the first display means when executing the second effect,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C2-3]
A gaming machine according to claim 1 or claim 2,
The first accessory covers a part of the first display means when executing the first effect,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C2-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
The first effect is a light emission effect in which the first accessory emits light.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C2-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein
The second effect is a light emission effect in which the second accessory emits light.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C2-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
Each of the first display means and the second display means is configured to be movable.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  The hold display decoration design effects A to E will be described below with reference to FIGS. This on-hold display decorative design effect is an effect related to a decorative design variation effect.

[Hold display decoration design effect A]
FIG. 107 is a diagram for explaining the hold display decoration design effect A.
First, in the hold display decoration design effect A, as shown in FIG. 107 (A), a change start effect is executed. In this change start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are changing are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the teammate character CRA, the first hold icon 9A, and the second hold icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7b.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (B), reach effect A is executed. In this reach effect A, a reach state in which the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are the same symbol is represented. Specifically, the decorative pattern in the reach state is displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. In the reach effect A, the first hold icon 9A and the second hold icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7b. The reach production A includes a normal reach production with a relatively high jackpot expectation level and a super reach production with a relatively high jackpot expectation level. The super reach effect is an effect that may be developed and executed from the normal reach effect. In this reach production, the “6” symbol is reached.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (C), reach effect B is executed. In the reach effect B, the decorative design in the reach state is continuously displayed from the reach effect A across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. In the reach effect B, the first hold icon 9A and the second hold icon 9C displayed on the display screen 7b are moved to the display screen 7a and displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Hold display decoration design effect B]
FIG. 108 is a diagram for explaining the hold display decoration design effect B.
First, in the hold display decoration design effect B, as shown in FIG. 108 (A), a change start effect is executed. In this change start effect, the decorative pattern that is changing is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the teammate character CRA, the first hold icon 9A, and the second hold icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7b.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (B), reach effect A is executed. This reach effect A is an effect performed during the reach state in which the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are the same symbol. In this reach effect A, the decorative symbols in the reach state are displayed on the display screen 7a. In the reach effect A, the first hold icon 9A and the second hold icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7b. The reach production A includes a normal reach production with a relatively high jackpot expectation level and a super reach production with a relatively high jackpot expectation level. The super reach effect is an effect that may be developed and executed from the normal reach effect. In this reach production, the “6” symbol is reached.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (C), reach effect B is executed. In the reach effect B, the decorative symbols in the reach state displayed on the display screen 7a are moved to the display screen 7b and displayed on the display screen 7b. In the reach effect B, the first hold icon 9A and the second hold icon 9C displayed on the display screen 7b are moved to the display screen 7a and displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Hold display decoration design effect C]
FIG. 109 is a diagram for explaining the hold display decoration design effect C. FIG.
First, in the hold display decoration design effect C, a change start effect is executed as shown in FIG. 109 (A). In this change start effect, the decorative pattern that is changing is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the teammate character CRA, the first hold icon 9A, and the second hold icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7b.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (B), reach effect A is executed. This reach effect A is an effect performed during the reach state in which the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are the same symbol. In this reach effect A, the decorative symbols in the reach state are displayed on the display screen 7a. In the reach effect A, the first hold icon 9A and the second hold icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7b. The reach production A includes a normal reach production with a relatively high jackpot expectation level and a super reach production with a relatively high jackpot expectation level. The super reach effect is an effect that may be developed and executed from the normal reach effect. In this reach production, the “6” symbol is reached.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (C), reach effect B is executed. In the reach effect B, the decorative symbols in the reach state displayed on the display screen 7a are moved to the display screen 7b and displayed on the display screen 7b. In the reach effect B, the first hold icon 9A and the second hold icon 9C displayed on the display screen 7b are moved to the display screen 7a and displayed on the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (D), reach effect C is executed. In the reach effect C, the decorative symbols, the first hold icon 9A, the second hold icon 9C, and the teammate character CRA in the reach state are displayed on the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b, respectively.

[Hold display decoration design effect D]
FIG. 110 is a diagram for explaining the hold display decoration design effect D. FIG.
First, in the hold display decoration design effect D, as shown in FIG. 110 (A), a change start effect is executed. In this change start effect, the decorative pattern that is changing is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the teammate character CRA, the first hold icon 9A, and the second hold icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7b.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (B), reach effect A is executed. This reach effect A is an effect performed during the reach state in which the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are the same symbol. In this reach effect A, the decorative symbols in the reach state are displayed on the display screen 7a. In the reach effect A, the first hold icon 9A and the second hold icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7b. The reach production A includes a normal reach production with a relatively high jackpot expectation level and a super reach production with a relatively high jackpot expectation level. The super reach effect is an effect that may be developed and executed from the normal reach effect. In this reach production, the “6” symbol is reached.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (C), reach effect B is executed. In the reach effect B, the decorative symbols in the reach state displayed on the display screen 7a are moved to the display screen 7b and displayed on the display screen 7b. In the reach effect B, the first hold icon 9A and the second hold icon 9C displayed on the display screen 7b are moved to the display screen 7a and displayed on the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (D), reach effect C is executed. In the reach effect C, the first hold icon 9A and the second hold icon 9C displayed on the display screen 7a are moved to the display screen 7b, and the decorative symbol in the reach state is displayed on the display screen 7b. A hold icon 9A and a second hold icon 9C are displayed.

[Hold display decoration design effect E]
FIG. 111 is a diagram for explaining the hold display decoration design effect E. FIG.
First, in the hold display decoration design effect E, a change start effect is executed as shown in FIG. In this change start effect, the decorative pattern that is changing is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the teammate character CRA, the first hold icon 9A, and the second hold icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7b.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (B), reach effect A is executed. This reach effect A is an effect performed during the reach state in which the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are the same symbol. In this reach effect A, the decorative symbols in the reach state are displayed on the display screen 7a. In the reach effect A, the first hold icon 9A and the second hold icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7b. The reach production A includes a normal reach production with a relatively high jackpot expectation level and a super reach production with a relatively high jackpot expectation level. The super reach effect is an effect that may be developed and executed from the normal reach effect. In this reach production, the “6” symbol is reached.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (C), reach effect B is executed. In the reach effect B, the decorative symbols in the reach state displayed on the display screen 7a are moved to the display screen 7b and displayed on the display screen 7b. In the reach effect B, the first hold icon 9A and the second hold icon 9C displayed on the display screen 7b are moved to the display screen 7a and displayed on the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (D), reach effect C is executed. In the reach effect C, the decorative symbol in the reach state displayed on the display screen 7b moves to the display screen 7a, and the decorative symbol in the reach state, the first hold icon 9A, and the first hold icon 9A are displayed on the display screen 7a. 2 hold icon 9C is displayed.

[Example of effects]
Below, the example of an effect of a hold display decoration design effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 107 to 111, when the hold icon is displayed on the display screen 7b, the decorative symbols are displayed on the display screen 7a, so that the interest is improved. Can be made.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 109 to 110, when the hold icon is displayed on the display screen 7b, the decorative symbols are displayed on the display screen 7a, and then the display screen is displayed. In 7b, the hold icon and the decorative pattern change display are realized. According to this structure, interest can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 108, when the hold icon is displayed on the display screen 7b, the decorative symbol is not changed on the display screen 7b, and the decorative symbol is changed on the display screen 7a. When the display is being performed, the hold icon is not displayed on the display screen 7a. According to this structure, interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 107 to 111, when the hold icon is displayed on the display screen 7 b, the decorative symbols are changed on the display screen 7 a, and then the display screen is displayed. The hold icon displayed in 7b is moved to the display screen 7a and displayed on the display screen 7b. According to this structure, interest can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 107 to 111, when the hold icon is displayed on the display screen 7 b, the decorative symbols are changed on the display screen 7 a, and then the display screen is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display displayed in 7a is moved to the display screen 7b and displayed on the display screen 7b. According to this structure, interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of a hold display decoration design effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, five patterns of the hold display decoration design effects A to E are implemented as the hold display decoration design effects, but the present invention is not limited to this, and You may make it implement the production which combined the some pattern of them.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the hold display decoration design effects A to E, the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B are adjacent to each other, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, the first image display device 7A and / or the second image display device 7B may be moved to perform the on-hold display decoration symbol effects A to E. Moreover, you may make it perform holding display decoration design effect AE in the state which 7A of 1st image display apparatuses and 2nd image display apparatus 7B left | separated predetermined distance.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when performing the hold display decoration symbol effects A to E, the first image display device 7A may be the main display device, and the second image display device 7B may be the sub display device. The first image display device 7A may be a sub display device, and the second image display device 7B may be a main display device. In this case, the main display device can be defined as a display device that takes longer to change the decorative design than the sub display device.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the following modes can be realized.
[Aspect E1-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects,
The display means includes a first display means and a second display means different from the first display means,
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one effect among the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of performing a display with a hold display on the first display means,
The second display effect is an effect of performing display with a symbol variation display on the second display means,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed when the first display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect E1-1]
A gaming machine according to aspect 1,
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The third display effect is an effect of performing display with the hold display and the symbol variation display on the first display means,
In the combination effect, when the first display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed, and then the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect E1-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect 1 or aspect 2,
When the hold display is performed by the first display means in the first display effect, the symbol variation display is not performed by the first display means.
In the second display effect, when the symbol variation display is performed by the second display means, the hold display is not performed by the second display means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect E1-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 3,
In the combination effect, when the first display effect is performed, after the second display effect is performed, the hold display performed by the first display unit is displayed on the second display. Production to move to means is performed,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect E1-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 4,
In the combination effect, when the first display effect is performed, after the second display effect is performed, the symbol variation display performed by the second display means is displayed on the first display effect. Production to move to the display means is performed,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  The variable time index effects A to E will be described below with reference to FIGS. This variation time index effect is an effect related to the variation effect of the decorative design. These variable time index effects A to E may be executed in a short time.

[Variation time index production A]
FIG. 112 is a diagram for explaining the variation time index effect A.
First, in the variation time index effect A, a variation start effect is executed as shown in FIG. In this change start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are changing are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the teammate character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7b.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (B), the changing effect is executed. In this changing effect, the decorative symbol changes on the display screen 7a, and the change end time suggestion image E2A is displayed on the display screen 7b. This variation end time suggestion image E2A represents the time until the end of the variation in the timer value, that is, the variation end time suggestion image E2A is a time until the end of the variation (time until the variation stop of the special symbol ) To function as an index. In the example of FIG. 112 (B), the variation end time suggestion image E2A is set to 30 seconds as an initial value.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (C), the variation end effect is executed. In this variation end effect, the lost symbol arrangement is displayed on the display screen 7a using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. In the variation end effect, on the display screen 7b, the timer value of the variation end time suggestion image E2A (time until the end of the variation) is set to 0 seconds, which suggests that the variation ends.

[Variation time index production B]
FIG. 113 is a diagram for explaining the variation time index effect B.
First, in the variation time index effect B, a variation start effect is executed as shown in FIG. 113 (A). In this change start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are changing are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the teammate character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7b.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (B), a changing effect is executed. In this changing effect, the decorative symbol changes on the display screen 7a, and the change end time suggestion image E2A is displayed on the display screen 7b. The variation end time suggestion image E2A includes a meter image E2AA, a cursor image E2A1, a chance up suggestion image E2A2, and a chance up schedule suggestion image E2A3. The meter image E2AA is a meter in which a meter region (represented by cross-hatching in the figure) formed by the cursor image E2A1 moves from the start position to the end position, and the cursor image E2A1 moves from the start position to the end position. Represents the time to the end of the change (time to stop the change of the special symbol). That is, the variation end time suggestion image E2A functions as an index representing the time until the end of the variation. The chance-up schedule suggestion image E2A3 is arranged on the meter image E2AA. When the cursor image E2A1 moves and the cursor image E2A1 overlaps (matches) the chance-up schedule suggestion image E2A3, a chance-up effect may be executed. When the chance up effect is executed, the chance up schedule suggestion image E2A3 is changed to the chance up suggestion image E2A2. The chance-up suggested image E2A2 is arranged on the meter image E2AA, and suggests that the chance-up effect has been executed at that timing.

  That is, in the meter image E2AA, the cursor image E2A1 moves from the start position to the chance-up schedule suggestion image E2A3, and thus represents the timing from the start of the chance-up meter effect to the timing at which the chance-up effect can be executed.

  As the chance-up effect, one chance-up effect is selected from among a plurality of chance-up effects including the chance-up effect of the first aspect and the chance-up effect of the second aspect. For example, a red cut-in effect with a relatively high jackpot expectation degree is performed as a chance-up effect in the first aspect, and a blue cut-in effect with a relatively low jackpot expectation degree is provided as the chance-up effect in the second aspect. Is done.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (C), the variation end effect is executed. In this variation end effect, the lost symbol arrangement is displayed on the display screen 7a using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. In the variation end effect, it is suggested that the variation ends when the cursor image E2A1 of the variation end time suggestion image E2A reaches the end position of the meter image E2AA on the display screen 7b.

[Variation time index production C]
FIG. 114 is a diagram for explaining the variation time index effect C. FIG.
First, in the variation time index effect C, a variation start effect is executed as shown in FIG. In this change start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are changing are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the teammate character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7b.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (B), a changing effect is executed. In the changing effect, the pseudo-continuous effect is executed using the decorative design on the display screen 7a. In this pseudo-continuous effect, the pseudo-ream is expressed by a state in which the decorative design 8L and the decorative design 8R are the same design and the decorative design 8C is a predetermined logo design.

  Note that the pseudo-continuous effect is an effect that is executed at the start of a variable effect or during a reach effect, and pretends as if the variable effect has been performed many times. As a pseudo-continuous effect, for example, an effect of repeating the effect of starting and temporarily stopping the decorative symbol, an effect of repeating an effect of temporarily stopping at least a part of a predetermined symbol arrangement of the decorative symbol, or temporarily stopping a predetermined logo You may make it perform the effect etc. which perform the variation effect of a decoration symbol, etc. with the effect which repeats an effect, or the display reminiscent of pseudo | simulation associations, such as "x2", "x3", and "pseudo".

  In the changing effect, the change end time suggestion image E2A is displayed on the display screen 7b. The variation end time suggestion image E2A includes a meter image E2AA, a cursor image E2A1, a chance up suggestion image E2A2, and a chance up schedule suggestion image E2A3. The meter image E2AA is a meter in which a meter region (represented by cross-hatching in the figure) formed by the cursor image E2A1 moves from the start position to the end position, and the cursor image E2A1 moves from the start position to the end position. Represents the time until the end of the change. That is, the variation end time suggestion image E2A functions as an index representing the time until the end of the variation (the time until the special symbol variation stops). The chance-up schedule suggestion image E2A3 is arranged on the meter image E2AA. When the cursor image E2A1 moves and the cursor image E2A1 overlaps (matches) the chance-up schedule suggestion image E2A3, a pseudo-continuous effect as a chance-up effect may be executed. When the pseudo-continuous effect (chance-up effect) is executed, the chance-up scheduled suggestion image E2A3 is changed to the chance-up completed suggestion image E2A2. The chance-up suggested image E2A2 is arranged on the meter image E2AA, and suggests that the pseudo-continuous effect (chance-up effect) has been executed at that timing.

  That is, in the meter image E2AA, the cursor image E2A1 moves from the start position to the chance-up schedule suggestion image E2A3, and represents the timing from the start of the chance-up meter effect to the timing at which the pseudo-continuous effect (chance-up effect) can be executed. Yes.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (C), the variation end effect is executed. In this variation end effect, the lost symbol arrangement is displayed on the display screen 7a using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. In the variation end effect, it is suggested that the variation ends when the cursor image E2A1 of the variation end time suggestion image E2A reaches the end position of the meter image E2AA on the display screen 7b.

[Variation time index production D]
FIG. 115 is a diagram for explaining the variation time index effect D. FIG.
First, in the variation time index effect D, a variation start effect is executed as shown in FIG. In this change start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are changing are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the teammate character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7b.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (B), the changing effect A is executed. In the changing effect A, the decorative symbol changes on the display screen 7a, and the change end time suggestion image E2A is displayed on the display screen 7b. The variation end time suggestion image E2A includes a meter image E2AA, a cursor image E2A1, a chance up suggestion image E2A2, and a chance up schedule suggestion image E2A3. The meter image E2AA is a meter in which a meter region (represented by cross-hatching in the figure) formed by the cursor image E2A1 moves from the start position to the end position, and the cursor image E2A1 moves from the start position to the end position. Represents the time until the end of the change. That is, the variation end time suggestion image E2A functions as an index representing the time until the end of the variation (the time until the special symbol variation stops). The chance-up schedule suggestion image E2A3 is arranged on the meter image E2AA. When the cursor image E2A1 moves and the cursor image E2A1 overlaps (matches) the chance-up schedule suggestion image E2A3, a chance-up effect may be executed. When the chance up effect is executed, the chance up schedule suggestion image E2A3 is changed to the chance up suggestion image E2A2. The chance-up suggested image E2A2 is arranged on the meter image E2AA, and suggests that the chance-up effect has been executed at that timing.

  That is, in the meter image E2AA, the cursor image E2A1 moves from the start position to the chance-up schedule suggestion image E2A3, and thus represents the timing from the start of the chance-up meter effect to the timing at which the chance-up effect can be executed.

  As the chance-up effect, one chance-up effect is selected from among a plurality of chance-up effects including the chance-up effect of the first aspect and the chance-up effect of the second aspect. For example, as a chance up effect of the first aspect, a background effect of a red background having a relatively high degree of jackpot expectation is performed, and as a chance up effect of the second aspect, a blue background having a relatively low degree of expectation of a big hit The background production is performed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (C), the changing effect B is executed. In this changing effect, the decorative symbol changes on the display screen 7a, and the change end time suggestion image E2A is displayed on the display screen 7b. In the change end time suggestion image E2A of the display screen 7b, the cursor image E2A1 of the changing effect A is changed to the cursor image E2A11. The cursor image E2A11 is in a mode in which the cursor image is larger than the cursor image E2A1 of the changing effect A. The cursor image E2A11 is an image that suggests a chance up (an image that suggests that the degree of expectation for jackpot is high). Therefore, the changing effect B is a chance-up effect compared to the changing effect A.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (D), the variation end effect is executed. In this variation end effect, the lost symbol arrangement is displayed on the display screen 7a using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. In the variation end effect, it is suggested that the variation ends when the cursor image E2A1 of the variation end time suggestion image E2A reaches the end position of the meter image E2AA on the display screen 7b. In this variation end effect, the cursor image returns to the cursor image E2A1.

[Variation time index production E]
FIG. 116 is a diagram for explaining the variation time index effect E. FIG.
In the variation time index effect B, the first image display device 7A (display screen 7a) and the second image display device 7B (display screen 7b) are executed as image display devices. It is executed only on the first image display device 7A (display screen 7a). Note that this variation time index effect E may be executed only by the second image display device 7B.

  First, in the variation time index effect E, a variation start effect is executed as shown in FIG. In this variation start effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are changing and the teammate character CRA are displayed on the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (B), a changing effect is executed. In the changing effect, the decoration pattern is continuously changed on the display screen 7a, and the change end time suggestion image E2A is displayed. The variation end time suggestion image E2A includes a meter image E2AA, a cursor image E2A1, a chance up suggestion image E2A2, and a chance up schedule suggestion image E2A3. The meter image E2AA is a meter in which a meter region (represented by cross-hatching in the figure) formed by the cursor image E2A1 moves from the start position to the end position, and the cursor image E2A1 moves from the start position to the end position. Represents the time to the end of the change (time to stop the change of the special symbol). That is, the variation end time suggestion image E2A functions as an index representing the time until the end of the variation. The chance-up schedule suggestion image E2A3 is arranged on the meter image E2AA. When the cursor image E2A1 moves and the cursor image E2A1 overlaps (matches) the chance-up schedule suggestion image E2A3, a chance-up effect may be executed. When the chance up effect is executed, the chance up schedule suggestion image E2A3 is changed to the chance up suggestion image E2A2. The chance-up suggested image E2A2 is arranged on the meter image E2AA, and suggests that the chance-up effect has been executed at that timing.

  That is, in the meter image E2AA, the cursor image E2A1 moves from the start position to the chance-up schedule suggestion image E2A3, and thus represents the timing from the start of the chance-up meter effect to the timing at which the chance-up effect can be executed.

  As the chance-up effect, one chance-up effect is selected from among a plurality of chance-up effects including the chance-up effect of the first aspect and the chance-up effect of the second aspect. For example, a red cut-in effect with a relatively high jackpot expectation degree is performed as a chance-up effect in the first aspect, and a blue cut-in effect with a relatively low jackpot expectation degree is provided as the chance-up effect in the second aspect. Is done.

Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (C), the variation end effect is executed. In this variation end effect, the lost symbol array is displayed on the display screen 7a using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the cursor image E2A1 of the variation end time suggestion image E2A has reached the end position of the meter image E2AA. , Suggesting that the change will end.
[Example of effects]
Below, the example of an effect of a change time index production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 112 to 116, during the change of the decorative symbol (during the change of the special symbol), the time until the change ends (the time until the change of the special symbol changes) An effect of displaying an index representing) is executed. According to this structure, interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 112 to 116, the index indicating the time until the change ends (time until the special symbol change stop) includes a cursor image, and the cursor image Represents the time until the fluctuation ends (time until the fluctuation of the special symbol stops) by moving to the end position of the meter image. According to this structure, interest can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 114, an index representing the time until the change ends (time until the change of the special symbol) is displayed on the pseudo-continuous effect using the decorative symbol. Production is performed. According to this structure, interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 115, the variation end time suggestion image E2A is used as an index representing the time until the variation ends (time until the variation stop of the special symbol). In the variation end time suggestion image E2A, there are cases where the cursor image is relatively small and large, and when the cursor image is large, the big hit expectation is relatively small compared to the case where the cursor image is small. It has a high configuration. According to this structure, interest can be improved.
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 115, the variation end time suggestion image E2A is used as an index representing the time until the variation ends (time until the variation stop of the special symbol). In the change end time suggestion image E2A, the chance up schedule suggestion image E2A3 is displayed to indicate that the chance up effect (pseudo-continuous effect) is performed. According to this structure, interest can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 112 to 116, the variable time index effects A to E can be executed in a short time. According to this configuration, interest can be improved in a short time.

[Modification]
In the following, a variation of the variation time index effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the five patterns of the variable time index effects A to E are implemented as the variable time index effects. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and one of the A to E You may make it implement the production which combined the some pattern.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the variation time index effects A to D, the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B are adjacent to each other, but the present invention is limited to this. It is not a thing. For example, the first image display device 7A and / or the second image display device 7B may be moved to perform the variable time index effects A to D. Moreover, you may make it perform variable time parameter | index effect production AD in the state where 7 A of 1st image display apparatuses and the 2nd image display apparatus 7B left | separated predetermined distance.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when performing the variable time index effects A to D, the first image display device 7A may be the main display device, the second image display device 7B may be the sub display device, The one image display device 7A may be a sub display device, and the second image display device 7B may be a main display device. In this case, the main display device can be defined as a display device that takes longer to change the decorative design than the sub display device.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the change time index effect D is changed from the cursor image E2A1 to the cursor image E2A11, thereby providing a chance-up effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the color of the cursor image may be changed as an aspect of the chance up effect, or the cursor image may be changed to another character (such as a premium character).

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the variation time index effects A to E, the variation end time suggestion image E2A is used to suggest the time until the end of the variation (time until the variation stop of the special symbol). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, among the suspended fluctuations, the time until the end of the fluctuation corresponding to the predetermined hold (time until the change of the special symbol corresponding to the predetermined hold stops) may be suggested.

[Aspect E2-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects and special symbol variation display means for variably displaying special symbols,
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one effect among the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of variably displaying decorative symbols,
The second display effect is an effect of displaying an index representing a variation end time of the special symbol during the variation of the special symbol,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed when the first display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect E2-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect E2-1,
The indicator includes a cursor display, and the cursor display moves to an end position, and represents the variation end time of the special symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect E2-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect E2-1 or aspect E2-2,
The first display effect is an effect including a pseudo-continuous effect using the decorative design.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect E2-4]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects E2-1 to E2-3,
The display mode of the indicator in the second display effect includes a first display mode and a second display mode different from the first display mode, and suggests a chance increase by the display mode of the index. There is a case, the jackpot expectation is higher in the case of the second display mode than in the case of the first display mode,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect E2-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects E2-1 to E2-4,
The combination effect is performed when the gaming state is a short-time state,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Other variations]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effects using the first image display device 7A (display screen 7a) and the second image display device 7B (display screen 7b) have been described. , Decorative symbols, hold icons, button images B, or select button images move from the display screen 7a to the display screen 7b, move from the display screen 7b to the display screen 7a, or display screen 7a and display screen 7b. It may be displayed across the screen.

  The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment has been described by taking a pachinko gaming machine as an example, but is not limited thereto. For example, instead of a pachinko gaming machine, the present invention may be applied to a swing-type gaming machine such as a slot machine, an arrange ball gaming machine, or a sparrow ball gaming machine. When the gaming machine 1 is a slot machine, the gaming medium may be changed from a gaming ball to a gaming medal.

  In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effect button 63 is provided as an operation unit to be operated by the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a lever, a trigger, or the like may be used as the operation unit to be operated by the player. . Moreover, in the display effect in the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the display effect may be executed using a button image representing the effect button 63. Instead, the display effect is performed using an image representing the sword member 64. You may make it perform, and you may make it perform a display effect using the image showing a lever or a trigger.

  In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the time is displayed using the timer value of the timer image as the timer display. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the time may be expressed by a meter method or an indicator method.

  The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device for paying out balls, but is not limited to this. For example, instead of the gaming machine 1, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine that is not equipped with a payout device, such as a so-called enclosed gaming machine.

  Further, two or more effects and / or modifications may be combined among the above-described effects and / or modifications. Further, the gaming machine 1 may include a sub display device in addition to the image display device 7. In this case, the display effect described above may be executed by the sub display device.

  As mentioned above, although this aspect was demonstrated based on embodiment and a modification, embodiment of an above-described aspect is for making an understanding of this aspect easy, and does not limit this aspect. This aspect can be changed and improved without departing from the spirit and scope of the claims, and equivalents are included in this aspect.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Game machine 3 ... Game area | region 7 ... Image display apparatus 9A ... 1st hold icon 9B ... 1st hold icon 9C ... 2nd hold icon 15 ... Board movable body 20 ... 1st starting port (1st entrance)
21 ... 2nd starting port (2nd entrance)
81 ... Game control microcomputer 91 ... Production control microcomputer 101 ... Image control microcomputer

Claims (1)

First display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
A second display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images, and a gaming machine comprising:
One of the plurality of types of images is a specific image representing a specific target,
The first effect in which the specific image is displayed on the first display unit in a state where the specific image is in contact with the end of the first display unit, and after the first effect, the first A second effect in which the specific image is displayed across both the first display unit and the second display unit in a state where the specific image is continuously in contact with the end of the display unit. , After the second effect, it is possible to execute a third effect in which the hold icon displayed on the second display means changes,
The size of the specific object represented by the specific image in the first effect is different from the size of the specific object represented by the specific image in the second effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images